* gdb.dwarf2/dup-psym.exp: Use prepare_for_testing_full.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdbint.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*- texinfo -*-
2 @setfilename gdbint.info
3 @include gdb-cfg.texi
4 @settitle @value{GDBN} Internals
5 @setchapternewpage off
6 @dircategory Software development
7 @direntry
8 * Gdb-Internals: (gdbint). The GNU debugger's internals.
9 @end direntry
10
11 @copying
12 Copyright @copyright{} 1990-1994, 1996, 1998-2006, 2008-2012 Free
13 Software Foundation, Inc.
14 Contributed by Cygnus Solutions. Written by John Gilmore.
15 Second Edition by Stan Shebs.
16
17 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
18 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
19 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
20 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
21 Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
22 Free Documentation License''.
23 @end copying
24
25 @ifnottex
26 This file documents the internals of the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
27
28 @insertcopying
29 @end ifnottex
30
31 @syncodeindex vr fn
32
33 @titlepage
34 @title @value{GDBN} Internals
35 @subtitle A guide to the internals of the GNU debugger
36 @author John Gilmore
37 @author Cygnus Solutions
38 @author Second Edition:
39 @author Stan Shebs
40 @author Cygnus Solutions
41 @page
42 @tex
43 \def\$#1${{#1}} % Kluge: collect RCS revision info without $...$
44 \xdef\manvers{\$Revision$} % For use in headers, footers too
45 {\parskip=0pt
46 \hfill Cygnus Solutions\par
47 \hfill \manvers\par
48 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
49 }
50 @end tex
51
52 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
53 @insertcopying
54 @end titlepage
55
56 @contents
57
58 @node Top
59 @c Perhaps this should be the title of the document (but only for info,
60 @c not for TeX). Existing GNU manuals seem inconsistent on this point.
61 @top Scope of this Document
62
63 This document documents the internals of the GNU debugger, @value{GDBN}. It
64 includes description of @value{GDBN}'s key algorithms and operations, as well
65 as the mechanisms that adapt @value{GDBN} to specific hosts and targets.
66
67 @menu
68 * Summary::
69 * Overall Structure::
70 * Algorithms::
71 * User Interface::
72 * libgdb::
73 * Values::
74 * Stack Frames::
75 * Symbol Handling::
76 * Language Support::
77 * Host Definition::
78 * Target Architecture Definition::
79 * Target Descriptions::
80 * Target Vector Definition::
81 * Native Debugging::
82 * Support Libraries::
83 * Coding Standards::
84 * Misc Guidelines::
85 * Porting GDB::
86 * Versions and Branches::
87 * Start of New Year Procedure::
88 * Releasing GDB::
89 * Testsuite::
90 * Hints::
91
92 * GDB Observers:: @value{GDBN} Currently available observers
93 * GNU Free Documentation License:: The license for this documentation
94 * Concept Index::
95 * Function and Variable Index::
96 @end menu
97
98 @node Summary
99 @chapter Summary
100
101 @menu
102 * Requirements::
103 * Contributors::
104 @end menu
105
106 @node Requirements
107 @section Requirements
108 @cindex requirements for @value{GDBN}
109
110 Before diving into the internals, you should understand the formal
111 requirements and other expectations for @value{GDBN}. Although some
112 of these may seem obvious, there have been proposals for @value{GDBN}
113 that have run counter to these requirements.
114
115 First of all, @value{GDBN} is a debugger. It's not designed to be a
116 front panel for embedded systems. It's not a text editor. It's not a
117 shell. It's not a programming environment.
118
119 @value{GDBN} is an interactive tool. Although a batch mode is
120 available, @value{GDBN}'s primary role is to interact with a human
121 programmer.
122
123 @value{GDBN} should be responsive to the user. A programmer hot on
124 the trail of a nasty bug, and operating under a looming deadline, is
125 going to be very impatient of everything, including the response time
126 to debugger commands.
127
128 @value{GDBN} should be relatively permissive, such as for expressions.
129 While the compiler should be picky (or have the option to be made
130 picky), since source code lives for a long time usually, the
131 programmer doing debugging shouldn't be spending time figuring out to
132 mollify the debugger.
133
134 @value{GDBN} will be called upon to deal with really large programs.
135 Executable sizes of 50 to 100 megabytes occur regularly, and we've
136 heard reports of programs approaching 1 gigabyte in size.
137
138 @value{GDBN} should be able to run everywhere. No other debugger is
139 available for even half as many configurations as @value{GDBN}
140 supports.
141
142 @node Contributors
143 @section Contributors
144
145 The first edition of this document was written by John Gilmore of
146 Cygnus Solutions. The current second edition was written by Stan Shebs
147 of Cygnus Solutions, who continues to update the manual.
148
149 Over the years, many others have made additions and changes to this
150 document. This section attempts to record the significant contributors
151 to that effort. One of the virtues of free software is that everyone
152 is free to contribute to it; with regret, we cannot actually
153 acknowledge everyone here.
154
155 @quotation
156 @emph{Plea:} This section has only been added relatively recently (four
157 years after publication of the second edition). Additions to this
158 section are particularly welcome. If you or your friends (or enemies,
159 to be evenhanded) have been unfairly omitted from this list, we would
160 like to add your names!
161 @end quotation
162
163 A document such as this relies on being kept up to date by numerous
164 small updates by contributing engineers as they make changes to the
165 code base. The file @file{ChangeLog} in the @value{GDBN} distribution
166 approximates a blow-by-blow account. The most prolific contributors to
167 this important, but low profile task are Andrew Cagney (responsible
168 for over half the entries), Daniel Jacobowitz, Mark Kettenis, Jim
169 Blandy and Eli Zaretskii.
170
171 Eli Zaretskii and Daniel Jacobowitz wrote the sections documenting
172 watchpoints.
173
174 Jeremy Bennett updated the sections on initializing a new architecture
175 and register representation, and added the section on Frame Interpretation.
176
177
178 @node Overall Structure
179
180 @chapter Overall Structure
181
182 @value{GDBN} consists of three major subsystems: user interface,
183 symbol handling (the @dfn{symbol side}), and target system handling (the
184 @dfn{target side}).
185
186 The user interface consists of several actual interfaces, plus
187 supporting code.
188
189 The symbol side consists of object file readers, debugging info
190 interpreters, symbol table management, source language expression
191 parsing, type and value printing.
192
193 The target side consists of execution control, stack frame analysis, and
194 physical target manipulation.
195
196 The target side/symbol side division is not formal, and there are a
197 number of exceptions. For instance, core file support involves symbolic
198 elements (the basic core file reader is in BFD) and target elements (it
199 supplies the contents of memory and the values of registers). Instead,
200 this division is useful for understanding how the minor subsystems
201 should fit together.
202
203 @section The Symbol Side
204
205 The symbolic side of @value{GDBN} can be thought of as ``everything
206 you can do in @value{GDBN} without having a live program running''.
207 For instance, you can look at the types of variables, and evaluate
208 many kinds of expressions.
209
210 @section The Target Side
211
212 The target side of @value{GDBN} is the ``bits and bytes manipulator''.
213 Although it may make reference to symbolic info here and there, most
214 of the target side will run with only a stripped executable
215 available---or even no executable at all, in remote debugging cases.
216
217 Operations such as disassembly, stack frame crawls, and register
218 display, are able to work with no symbolic info at all. In some cases,
219 such as disassembly, @value{GDBN} will use symbolic info to present addresses
220 relative to symbols rather than as raw numbers, but it will work either
221 way.
222
223 @section Configurations
224
225 @cindex host
226 @cindex target
227 @dfn{Host} refers to attributes of the system where @value{GDBN} runs.
228 @dfn{Target} refers to the system where the program being debugged
229 executes. In most cases they are the same machine, in which case a
230 third type of @dfn{Native} attributes come into play.
231
232 Defines and include files needed to build on the host are host
233 support. Examples are tty support, system defined types, host byte
234 order, host float format. These are all calculated by @code{autoconf}
235 when the debugger is built.
236
237 Defines and information needed to handle the target format are target
238 dependent. Examples are the stack frame format, instruction set,
239 breakpoint instruction, registers, and how to set up and tear down the stack
240 to call a function.
241
242 Information that is only needed when the host and target are the same,
243 is native dependent. One example is Unix child process support; if the
244 host and target are not the same, calling @code{fork} to start the target
245 process is a bad idea. The various macros needed for finding the
246 registers in the @code{upage}, running @code{ptrace}, and such are all
247 in the native-dependent files.
248
249 Another example of native-dependent code is support for features that
250 are really part of the target environment, but which require
251 @code{#include} files that are only available on the host system. Core
252 file handling and @code{setjmp} handling are two common cases.
253
254 When you want to make @value{GDBN} work as the traditional native debugger
255 on a system, you will need to supply both target and native information.
256
257 @section Source Tree Structure
258 @cindex @value{GDBN} source tree structure
259
260 The @value{GDBN} source directory has a mostly flat structure---there
261 are only a few subdirectories. A file's name usually gives a hint as
262 to what it does; for example, @file{stabsread.c} reads stabs,
263 @file{dwarf2read.c} reads @sc{DWARF 2}, etc.
264
265 Files that are related to some common task have names that share
266 common substrings. For example, @file{*-thread.c} files deal with
267 debugging threads on various platforms; @file{*read.c} files deal with
268 reading various kinds of symbol and object files; @file{inf*.c} files
269 deal with direct control of the @dfn{inferior program} (@value{GDBN}
270 parlance for the program being debugged).
271
272 There are several dozens of files in the @file{*-tdep.c} family.
273 @samp{tdep} stands for @dfn{target-dependent code}---each of these
274 files implements debug support for a specific target architecture
275 (sparc, mips, etc). Usually, only one of these will be used in a
276 specific @value{GDBN} configuration (sometimes two, closely related).
277
278 Similarly, there are many @file{*-nat.c} files, each one for native
279 debugging on a specific system (e.g., @file{sparc-linux-nat.c} is for
280 native debugging of Sparc machines running the Linux kernel).
281
282 The few subdirectories of the source tree are:
283
284 @table @file
285 @item cli
286 Code that implements @dfn{CLI}, the @value{GDBN} Command-Line
287 Interpreter. @xref{User Interface, Command Interpreter}.
288
289 @item gdbserver
290 Code for the @value{GDBN} remote server.
291
292 @item gdbtk
293 Code for Insight, the @value{GDBN} TK-based GUI front-end.
294
295 @item mi
296 The @dfn{GDB/MI}, the @value{GDBN} Machine Interface interpreter.
297
298 @item signals
299 Target signal translation code.
300
301 @item tui
302 Code for @dfn{TUI}, the @value{GDBN} Text-mode full-screen User
303 Interface. @xref{User Interface, TUI}.
304 @end table
305
306 @node Algorithms
307
308 @chapter Algorithms
309 @cindex algorithms
310
311 @value{GDBN} uses a number of debugging-specific algorithms. They are
312 often not very complicated, but get lost in the thicket of special
313 cases and real-world issues. This chapter describes the basic
314 algorithms and mentions some of the specific target definitions that
315 they use.
316
317 @section Prologue Analysis
318
319 @cindex prologue analysis
320 @cindex call frame information
321 @cindex CFI (call frame information)
322 To produce a backtrace and allow the user to manipulate older frames'
323 variables and arguments, @value{GDBN} needs to find the base addresses
324 of older frames, and discover where those frames' registers have been
325 saved. Since a frame's ``callee-saves'' registers get saved by
326 younger frames if and when they're reused, a frame's registers may be
327 scattered unpredictably across younger frames. This means that
328 changing the value of a register-allocated variable in an older frame
329 may actually entail writing to a save slot in some younger frame.
330
331 Modern versions of GCC emit Dwarf call frame information (``CFI''),
332 which describes how to find frame base addresses and saved registers.
333 But CFI is not always available, so as a fallback @value{GDBN} uses a
334 technique called @dfn{prologue analysis} to find frame sizes and saved
335 registers. A prologue analyzer disassembles the function's machine
336 code starting from its entry point, and looks for instructions that
337 allocate frame space, save the stack pointer in a frame pointer
338 register, save registers, and so on. Obviously, this can't be done
339 accurately in general, but it's tractable to do well enough to be very
340 helpful. Prologue analysis predates the GNU toolchain's support for
341 CFI; at one time, prologue analysis was the only mechanism
342 @value{GDBN} used for stack unwinding at all, when the function
343 calling conventions didn't specify a fixed frame layout.
344
345 In the olden days, function prologues were generated by hand-written,
346 target-specific code in GCC, and treated as opaque and untouchable by
347 optimizers. Looking at this code, it was usually straightforward to
348 write a prologue analyzer for @value{GDBN} that would accurately
349 understand all the prologues GCC would generate. However, over time
350 GCC became more aggressive about instruction scheduling, and began to
351 understand more about the semantics of the prologue instructions
352 themselves; in response, @value{GDBN}'s analyzers became more complex
353 and fragile. Keeping the prologue analyzers working as GCC (and the
354 instruction sets themselves) evolved became a substantial task.
355
356 @cindex @file{prologue-value.c}
357 @cindex abstract interpretation of function prologues
358 @cindex pseudo-evaluation of function prologues
359 To try to address this problem, the code in @file{prologue-value.h}
360 and @file{prologue-value.c} provides a general framework for writing
361 prologue analyzers that are simpler and more robust than ad-hoc
362 analyzers. When we analyze a prologue using the prologue-value
363 framework, we're really doing ``abstract interpretation'' or
364 ``pseudo-evaluation'': running the function's code in simulation, but
365 using conservative approximations of the values registers and memory
366 would hold when the code actually runs. For example, if our function
367 starts with the instruction:
368
369 @example
370 addi r1, 42 # add 42 to r1
371 @end example
372 @noindent
373 we don't know exactly what value will be in @code{r1} after executing
374 this instruction, but we do know it'll be 42 greater than its original
375 value.
376
377 If we then see an instruction like:
378
379 @example
380 addi r1, 22 # add 22 to r1
381 @end example
382 @noindent
383 we still don't know what @code{r1's} value is, but again, we can say
384 it is now 64 greater than its original value.
385
386 If the next instruction were:
387
388 @example
389 mov r2, r1 # set r2 to r1's value
390 @end example
391 @noindent
392 then we can say that @code{r2's} value is now the original value of
393 @code{r1} plus 64.
394
395 It's common for prologues to save registers on the stack, so we'll
396 need to track the values of stack frame slots, as well as the
397 registers. So after an instruction like this:
398
399 @example
400 mov (fp+4), r2
401 @end example
402 @noindent
403 then we'd know that the stack slot four bytes above the frame pointer
404 holds the original value of @code{r1} plus 64.
405
406 And so on.
407
408 Of course, this can only go so far before it gets unreasonable. If we
409 wanted to be able to say anything about the value of @code{r1} after
410 the instruction:
411
412 @example
413 xor r1, r3 # exclusive-or r1 and r3, place result in r1
414 @end example
415 @noindent
416 then things would get pretty complex. But remember, we're just doing
417 a conservative approximation; if exclusive-or instructions aren't
418 relevant to prologues, we can just say @code{r1}'s value is now
419 ``unknown''. We can ignore things that are too complex, if that loss of
420 information is acceptable for our application.
421
422 So when we say ``conservative approximation'' here, what we mean is an
423 approximation that is either accurate, or marked ``unknown'', but
424 never inaccurate.
425
426 Using this framework, a prologue analyzer is simply an interpreter for
427 machine code, but one that uses conservative approximations for the
428 contents of registers and memory instead of actual values. Starting
429 from the function's entry point, you simulate instructions up to the
430 current PC, or an instruction that you don't know how to simulate.
431 Now you can examine the state of the registers and stack slots you've
432 kept track of.
433
434 @itemize @bullet
435
436 @item
437 To see how large your stack frame is, just check the value of the
438 stack pointer register; if it's the original value of the SP
439 minus a constant, then that constant is the stack frame's size.
440 If the SP's value has been marked as ``unknown'', then that means
441 the prologue has done something too complex for us to track, and
442 we don't know the frame size.
443
444 @item
445 To see where we've saved the previous frame's registers, we just
446 search the values we've tracked --- stack slots, usually, but
447 registers, too, if you want --- for something equal to the register's
448 original value. If the calling conventions suggest a standard place
449 to save a given register, then we can check there first, but really,
450 anything that will get us back the original value will probably work.
451 @end itemize
452
453 This does take some work. But prologue analyzers aren't
454 quick-and-simple pattern patching to recognize a few fixed prologue
455 forms any more; they're big, hairy functions. Along with inferior
456 function calls, prologue analysis accounts for a substantial portion
457 of the time needed to stabilize a @value{GDBN} port. So it's
458 worthwhile to look for an approach that will be easier to understand
459 and maintain. In the approach described above:
460
461 @itemize @bullet
462
463 @item
464 It's easier to see that the analyzer is correct: you just see
465 whether the analyzer properly (albeit conservatively) simulates
466 the effect of each instruction.
467
468 @item
469 It's easier to extend the analyzer: you can add support for new
470 instructions, and know that you haven't broken anything that
471 wasn't already broken before.
472
473 @item
474 It's orthogonal: to gather new information, you don't need to
475 complicate the code for each instruction. As long as your domain
476 of conservative values is already detailed enough to tell you
477 what you need, then all the existing instruction simulations are
478 already gathering the right data for you.
479
480 @end itemize
481
482 The file @file{prologue-value.h} contains detailed comments explaining
483 the framework and how to use it.
484
485
486 @section Breakpoint Handling
487
488 @cindex breakpoints
489 In general, a breakpoint is a user-designated location in the program
490 where the user wants to regain control if program execution ever reaches
491 that location.
492
493 There are two main ways to implement breakpoints; either as ``hardware''
494 breakpoints or as ``software'' breakpoints.
495
496 @cindex hardware breakpoints
497 @cindex program counter
498 Hardware breakpoints are sometimes available as a builtin debugging
499 features with some chips. Typically these work by having dedicated
500 register into which the breakpoint address may be stored. If the PC
501 (shorthand for @dfn{program counter})
502 ever matches a value in a breakpoint registers, the CPU raises an
503 exception and reports it to @value{GDBN}.
504
505 Another possibility is when an emulator is in use; many emulators
506 include circuitry that watches the address lines coming out from the
507 processor, and force it to stop if the address matches a breakpoint's
508 address.
509
510 A third possibility is that the target already has the ability to do
511 breakpoints somehow; for instance, a ROM monitor may do its own
512 software breakpoints. So although these are not literally ``hardware
513 breakpoints'', from @value{GDBN}'s point of view they work the same;
514 @value{GDBN} need not do anything more than set the breakpoint and wait
515 for something to happen.
516
517 Since they depend on hardware resources, hardware breakpoints may be
518 limited in number; when the user asks for more, @value{GDBN} will
519 start trying to set software breakpoints. (On some architectures,
520 notably the 32-bit x86 platforms, @value{GDBN} cannot always know
521 whether there's enough hardware resources to insert all the hardware
522 breakpoints and watchpoints. On those platforms, @value{GDBN} prints
523 an error message only when the program being debugged is continued.)
524
525 @cindex software breakpoints
526 Software breakpoints require @value{GDBN} to do somewhat more work.
527 The basic theory is that @value{GDBN} will replace a program
528 instruction with a trap, illegal divide, or some other instruction
529 that will cause an exception, and then when it's encountered,
530 @value{GDBN} will take the exception and stop the program. When the
531 user says to continue, @value{GDBN} will restore the original
532 instruction, single-step, re-insert the trap, and continue on.
533
534 Since it literally overwrites the program being tested, the program area
535 must be writable, so this technique won't work on programs in ROM. It
536 can also distort the behavior of programs that examine themselves,
537 although such a situation would be highly unusual.
538
539 Also, the software breakpoint instruction should be the smallest size of
540 instruction, so it doesn't overwrite an instruction that might be a jump
541 target, and cause disaster when the program jumps into the middle of the
542 breakpoint instruction. (Strictly speaking, the breakpoint must be no
543 larger than the smallest interval between instructions that may be jump
544 targets; perhaps there is an architecture where only even-numbered
545 instructions may jumped to.) Note that it's possible for an instruction
546 set not to have any instructions usable for a software breakpoint,
547 although in practice only the ARC has failed to define such an
548 instruction.
549
550 Basic breakpoint object handling is in @file{breakpoint.c}. However,
551 much of the interesting breakpoint action is in @file{infrun.c}.
552
553 @table @code
554 @cindex insert or remove software breakpoint
555 @findex target_remove_breakpoint
556 @findex target_insert_breakpoint
557 @item target_remove_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
558 @itemx target_insert_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
559 Insert or remove a software breakpoint at address
560 @code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}. Returns zero for success,
561 non-zero for failure. On input, @var{bp_tgt} contains the address of the
562 breakpoint, and is otherwise initialized to zero. The fields of the
563 @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by @var{bp_tgt} are updated
564 to contain other information about the breakpoint on output. The field
565 @code{placed_address} may be updated if the breakpoint was placed at a
566 related address; the field @code{shadow_contents} contains the real
567 contents of the bytes where the breakpoint has been inserted,
568 if reading memory would return the breakpoint instead of the
569 underlying memory; the field @code{shadow_len} is the length of
570 memory cached in @code{shadow_contents}, if any; and the field
571 @code{placed_size} is optionally set and used by the target, if
572 it could differ from @code{shadow_len}.
573
574 For example, the remote target @samp{Z0} packet does not require
575 shadowing memory, so @code{shadow_len} is left at zero. However,
576 the length reported by @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} is cached in
577 @code{placed_size}, so that a matching @samp{z0} packet can be
578 used to remove the breakpoint.
579
580 @cindex insert or remove hardware breakpoint
581 @findex target_remove_hw_breakpoint
582 @findex target_insert_hw_breakpoint
583 @item target_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
584 @itemx target_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
585 Insert or remove a hardware-assisted breakpoint at address
586 @code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}. Returns zero for success,
587 non-zero for failure. See @code{target_insert_breakpoint} for
588 a description of the @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by
589 @var{bp_tgt}; the @code{shadow_contents} and
590 @code{shadow_len} members are not used for hardware breakpoints,
591 but @code{placed_size} may be.
592 @end table
593
594 @section Single Stepping
595
596 @section Signal Handling
597
598 @section Thread Handling
599
600 @section Inferior Function Calls
601
602 @section Longjmp Support
603
604 @cindex @code{longjmp} debugging
605 @value{GDBN} has support for figuring out that the target is doing a
606 @code{longjmp} and for stopping at the target of the jump, if we are
607 stepping. This is done with a few specialized internal breakpoints,
608 which are visible in the output of the @samp{maint info breakpoint}
609 command.
610
611 @findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
612 To make this work, you need to define a function called
613 @code{gdbarch_get_longjmp_target}, which will examine the
614 @code{jmp_buf} structure and extract the @code{longjmp} target address.
615 Since @code{jmp_buf} is target specific and typically defined in a
616 target header not available to @value{GDBN}, you will need to
617 determine the offset of the PC manually and return that; many targets
618 define a @code{jb_pc_offset} field in the tdep structure to save the
619 value once calculated.
620
621 @section Watchpoints
622 @cindex watchpoints
623
624 Watchpoints are a special kind of breakpoints (@pxref{Algorithms,
625 breakpoints}) which break when data is accessed rather than when some
626 instruction is executed. When you have data which changes without
627 your knowing what code does that, watchpoints are the silver bullet to
628 hunt down and kill such bugs.
629
630 @cindex hardware watchpoints
631 @cindex software watchpoints
632 Watchpoints can be either hardware-assisted or not; the latter type is
633 known as ``software watchpoints.'' @value{GDBN} always uses
634 hardware-assisted watchpoints if they are available, and falls back on
635 software watchpoints otherwise. Typical situations where @value{GDBN}
636 will use software watchpoints are:
637
638 @itemize @bullet
639 @item
640 The watched memory region is too large for the underlying hardware
641 watchpoint support. For example, each x86 debug register can watch up
642 to 4 bytes of memory, so trying to watch data structures whose size is
643 more than 16 bytes will cause @value{GDBN} to use software
644 watchpoints.
645
646 @item
647 The value of the expression to be watched depends on data held in
648 registers (as opposed to memory).
649
650 @item
651 Too many different watchpoints requested. (On some architectures,
652 this situation is impossible to detect until the debugged program is
653 resumed.) Note that x86 debug registers are used both for hardware
654 breakpoints and for watchpoints, so setting too many hardware
655 breakpoints might cause watchpoint insertion to fail.
656
657 @item
658 No hardware-assisted watchpoints provided by the target
659 implementation.
660 @end itemize
661
662 Software watchpoints are very slow, since @value{GDBN} needs to
663 single-step the program being debugged and test the value of the
664 watched expression(s) after each instruction. The rest of this
665 section is mostly irrelevant for software watchpoints.
666
667 When the inferior stops, @value{GDBN} tries to establish, among other
668 possible reasons, whether it stopped due to a watchpoint being hit.
669 It first uses @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to see if any watchpoint
670 was hit. If not, all watchpoint checking is skipped.
671
672 Then @value{GDBN} calls @code{target_stopped_data_address} exactly
673 once. This method returns the address of the watchpoint which
674 triggered, if the target can determine it. If the triggered address
675 is available, @value{GDBN} compares the address returned by this
676 method with each watched memory address in each active watchpoint.
677 For data-read and data-access watchpoints, @value{GDBN} announces
678 every watchpoint that watches the triggered address as being hit.
679 For this reason, data-read and data-access watchpoints
680 @emph{require} that the triggered address be available; if not, read
681 and access watchpoints will never be considered hit. For data-write
682 watchpoints, if the triggered address is available, @value{GDBN}
683 considers only those watchpoints which match that address;
684 otherwise, @value{GDBN} considers all data-write watchpoints. For
685 each data-write watchpoint that @value{GDBN} considers, it evaluates
686 the expression whose value is being watched, and tests whether the
687 watched value has changed. Watchpoints whose watched values have
688 changed are announced as hit.
689
690 @c FIXME move these to the main lists of target/native defns
691
692 @value{GDBN} uses several macros and primitives to support hardware
693 watchpoints:
694
695 @table @code
696 @findex TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT
697 @item TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT (@var{type}, @var{count}, @var{other})
698 Return the number of hardware watchpoints of type @var{type} that are
699 possible to be set. The value is positive if @var{count} watchpoints
700 of this type can be set, zero if setting watchpoints of this type is
701 not supported, and negative if @var{count} is more than the maximum
702 number of watchpoints of type @var{type} that can be set. @var{other}
703 is non-zero if other types of watchpoints are currently enabled (there
704 are architectures which cannot set watchpoints of different types at
705 the same time).
706
707 @findex TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT
708 @item TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT (@var{addr}, @var{len})
709 Return non-zero if hardware watchpoints can be used to watch a region
710 whose address is @var{addr} and whose length in bytes is @var{len}.
711
712 @cindex insert or remove hardware watchpoint
713 @findex target_insert_watchpoint
714 @findex target_remove_watchpoint
715 @item target_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
716 @itemx target_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
717 Insert or remove a hardware watchpoint starting at @var{addr}, for
718 @var{len} bytes. @var{type} is the watchpoint type, one of the
719 possible values of the enumerated data type @code{target_hw_bp_type},
720 defined by @file{breakpoint.h} as follows:
721
722 @smallexample
723 enum target_hw_bp_type
724 @{
725 hw_write = 0, /* Common (write) HW watchpoint */
726 hw_read = 1, /* Read HW watchpoint */
727 hw_access = 2, /* Access (read or write) HW watchpoint */
728 hw_execute = 3 /* Execute HW breakpoint */
729 @};
730 @end smallexample
731
732 @noindent
733 These two macros should return 0 for success, non-zero for failure.
734
735 @findex target_stopped_data_address
736 @item target_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
737 If the inferior has some watchpoint that triggered, place the address
738 associated with the watchpoint at the location pointed to by
739 @var{addr_p} and return non-zero. Otherwise, return zero. This
740 is required for data-read and data-access watchpoints. It is
741 not required for data-write watchpoints, but @value{GDBN} uses
742 it to improve handling of those also.
743
744 @value{GDBN} will only call this method once per watchpoint stop,
745 immediately after calling @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}. If the
746 target's watchpoint indication is sticky, i.e., stays set after
747 resuming, this method should clear it. For instance, the x86 debug
748 control register has sticky triggered flags.
749
750 @findex target_watchpoint_addr_within_range
751 @item target_watchpoint_addr_within_range (@var{target}, @var{addr}, @var{start}, @var{length})
752 Check whether @var{addr} (as returned by @code{target_stopped_data_address})
753 lies within the hardware-defined watchpoint region described by
754 @var{start} and @var{length}. This only needs to be provided if the
755 granularity of a watchpoint is greater than one byte, i.e., if the
756 watchpoint can also trigger on nearby addresses outside of the watched
757 region.
758
759 @findex HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
760 @item HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
761 If defined to a non-zero value, it is not necessary to disable a
762 watchpoint to step over it. Like @code{gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint},
763 this is usually set when watchpoints trigger at the instruction
764 which will perform an interesting read or write. It should be
765 set if there is a temporary disable bit which allows the processor
766 to step over the interesting instruction without raising the
767 watchpoint exception again.
768
769 @findex gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint
770 @item int gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint (@var{gdbarch})
771 If it returns a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} should disable a
772 watchpoint to step the inferior over it. This is usually set when
773 watchpoints trigger at the instruction which will perform an
774 interesting read or write.
775
776 @findex HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
777 @item HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
778 If defined to a non-zero value, it is possible to continue the
779 inferior after a watchpoint has been hit. This is usually set
780 when watchpoints trigger at the instruction following an interesting
781 read or write.
782
783 @findex STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT
784 @item STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT (@var{wait_status})
785 Return non-zero if stopped by a watchpoint. @var{wait_status} is of
786 the type @code{struct target_waitstatus}, defined by @file{target.h}.
787 Normally, this macro is defined to invoke the function pointed to by
788 the @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} member of the structure (of the
789 type @code{target_ops}, defined on @file{target.h}) that describes the
790 target-specific operations; @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} ignores
791 the @var{wait_status} argument.
792
793 @value{GDBN} does not require the non-zero value returned by
794 @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to be 100% correct, so if a target cannot
795 determine for sure whether the inferior stopped due to a watchpoint,
796 it could return non-zero ``just in case''.
797 @end table
798
799 @subsection Watchpoints and Threads
800 @cindex watchpoints, with threads
801
802 @value{GDBN} only supports process-wide watchpoints, which trigger
803 in all threads. @value{GDBN} uses the thread ID to make watchpoints
804 act as if they were thread-specific, but it cannot set hardware
805 watchpoints that only trigger in a specific thread. Therefore, even
806 if the target supports threads, per-thread debug registers, and
807 watchpoints which only affect a single thread, it should set the
808 per-thread debug registers for all threads to the same value. On
809 @sc{gnu}/Linux native targets, this is accomplished by using
810 @code{ALL_LWPS} in @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and
811 @code{target_remove_watchpoint} and by using
812 @code{linux_set_new_thread} to register a handler for newly created
813 threads.
814
815 @value{GDBN}'s @sc{gnu}/Linux support only reports a single event
816 at a time, although multiple events can trigger simultaneously for
817 multi-threaded programs. When multiple events occur, @file{linux-nat.c}
818 queues subsequent events and returns them the next time the program
819 is resumed. This means that @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} and
820 @code{target_stopped_data_address} only need to consult the current
821 thread's state---the thread indicated by @code{inferior_ptid}. If
822 two threads have hit watchpoints simultaneously, those routines
823 will be called a second time for the second thread.
824
825 @subsection x86 Watchpoints
826 @cindex x86 debug registers
827 @cindex watchpoints, on x86
828
829 The 32-bit Intel x86 (a.k.a.@: ia32) processors feature special debug
830 registers designed to facilitate debugging. @value{GDBN} provides a
831 generic library of functions that x86-based ports can use to implement
832 support for watchpoints and hardware-assisted breakpoints. This
833 subsection documents the x86 watchpoint facilities in @value{GDBN}.
834
835 (At present, the library functions read and write debug registers directly, and are
836 thus only available for native configurations.)
837
838 To use the generic x86 watchpoint support, a port should do the
839 following:
840
841 @itemize @bullet
842 @findex I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
843 @item
844 Define the macro @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS} somewhere in the
845 target-dependent headers.
846
847 @item
848 Include the @file{config/i386/nm-i386.h} header file @emph{after}
849 defining @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
850
851 @item
852 Add @file{i386-nat.o} to the value of the Make variable
853 @code{NATDEPFILES} (@pxref{Native Debugging, NATDEPFILES}).
854
855 @item
856 Provide implementations for the @code{I386_DR_LOW_*} macros described
857 below. Typically, each macro should call a target-specific function
858 which does the real work.
859 @end itemize
860
861 The x86 watchpoint support works by maintaining mirror images of the
862 debug registers. Values are copied between the mirror images and the
863 real debug registers via a set of macros which each target needs to
864 provide:
865
866 @table @code
867 @findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL
868 @item I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL (@var{val})
869 Set the Debug Control (DR7) register to the value @var{val}.
870
871 @findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR
872 @item I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR (@var{idx}, @var{addr})
873 Put the address @var{addr} into the debug register number @var{idx}.
874
875 @findex I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR
876 @item I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR (@var{idx})
877 Reset (i.e.@: zero out) the address stored in the debug register
878 number @var{idx}.
879
880 @findex I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
881 @item I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
882 Return the value of the Debug Status (DR6) register. This value is
883 used immediately after it is returned by
884 @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}, so as to support per-thread status
885 register values.
886 @end table
887
888 For each one of the 4 debug registers (whose indices are from 0 to 3)
889 that store addresses, a reference count is maintained by @value{GDBN},
890 to allow sharing of debug registers by several watchpoints. This
891 allows users to define several watchpoints that watch the same
892 expression, but with different conditions and/or commands, without
893 wasting debug registers which are in short supply. @value{GDBN}
894 maintains the reference counts internally, targets don't have to do
895 anything to use this feature.
896
897 The x86 debug registers can each watch a region that is 1, 2, or 4
898 bytes long. The ia32 architecture requires that each watched region
899 be appropriately aligned: 2-byte region on 2-byte boundary, 4-byte
900 region on 4-byte boundary. However, the x86 watchpoint support in
901 @value{GDBN} can watch unaligned regions and regions larger than 4
902 bytes (up to 16 bytes) by allocating several debug registers to watch
903 a single region. This allocation of several registers per a watched
904 region is also done automatically without target code intervention.
905
906 The generic x86 watchpoint support provides the following API for the
907 @value{GDBN}'s application code:
908
909 @table @code
910 @findex i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint
911 @item i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len})
912 The macro @code{TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT} is set to call
913 this function. It counts the number of debug registers required to
914 watch a given region, and returns a non-zero value if that number is
915 less than 4, the number of debug registers available to x86
916 processors.
917
918 @findex i386_stopped_data_address
919 @item i386_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
920 The target function
921 @code{target_stopped_data_address} is set to call this function.
922 This
923 function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
924 Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
925 macro, and returns the address associated with the first bit that is
926 set in DR6.
927
928 @findex i386_stopped_by_watchpoint
929 @item i386_stopped_by_watchpoint (void)
930 The macro @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}
931 is set to call this function. The
932 argument passed to @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} is ignored. This
933 function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
934 Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
935 macro, and returns true if any bit is set. Otherwise, false is
936 returned.
937
938 @findex i386_insert_watchpoint
939 @findex i386_remove_watchpoint
940 @item i386_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
941 @itemx i386_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
942 Insert or remove a watchpoint. The macros
943 @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and @code{target_remove_watchpoint}
944 are set to call these functions. @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} first
945 looks for a debug register which is already set to watch the same
946 region for the same access types; if found, it just increments the
947 reference count of that debug register, thus implementing debug
948 register sharing between watchpoints. If no such register is found,
949 the function looks for a vacant debug register, sets its mirrored
950 value to @var{addr}, sets the mirrored value of DR7 Debug Control
951 register as appropriate for the @var{len} and @var{type} parameters,
952 and then passes the new values of the debug register and DR7 to the
953 inferior by calling @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR} and
954 @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}. If more than one debug register is
955 required to cover the given region, the above process is repeated for
956 each debug register.
957
958 @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} does the opposite: it resets the address
959 in the mirrored value of the debug register and its read/write and
960 length bits in the mirrored value of DR7, then passes these new
961 values to the inferior via @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and
962 @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}. If a register is shared by several
963 watchpoints, each time a @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} is called, it
964 decrements the reference count, and only calls
965 @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL} when
966 the count goes to zero.
967
968 @findex i386_insert_hw_breakpoint
969 @findex i386_remove_hw_breakpoint
970 @item i386_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
971 @itemx i386_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
972 These functions insert and remove hardware-assisted breakpoints. The
973 macros @code{target_insert_hw_breakpoint} and
974 @code{target_remove_hw_breakpoint} are set to call these functions.
975 The argument is a @code{struct bp_target_info *}, as described in
976 the documentation for @code{target_insert_breakpoint}.
977 These functions work like @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} and
978 @code{i386_remove_watchpoint}, respectively, except that they set up
979 the debug registers to watch instruction execution, and each
980 hardware-assisted breakpoint always requires exactly one debug
981 register.
982
983 @findex i386_cleanup_dregs
984 @item i386_cleanup_dregs (void)
985 This function clears all the reference counts, addresses, and control
986 bits in the mirror images of the debug registers. It doesn't affect
987 the actual debug registers in the inferior process.
988 @end table
989
990 @noindent
991 @strong{Notes:}
992 @enumerate 1
993 @item
994 x86 processors support setting watchpoints on I/O reads or writes.
995 However, since no target supports this (as of March 2001), and since
996 @code{enum target_hw_bp_type} doesn't even have an enumeration for I/O
997 watchpoints, this feature is not yet available to @value{GDBN} running
998 on x86.
999
1000 @item
1001 x86 processors can enable watchpoints locally, for the current task
1002 only, or globally, for all the tasks. For each debug register,
1003 there's a bit in the DR7 Debug Control register that determines
1004 whether the associated address is watched locally or globally. The
1005 current implementation of x86 watchpoint support in @value{GDBN}
1006 always sets watchpoints to be locally enabled, since global
1007 watchpoints might interfere with the underlying OS and are probably
1008 unavailable in many platforms.
1009 @end enumerate
1010
1011 @section Checkpoints
1012 @cindex checkpoints
1013 @cindex restart
1014 In the abstract, a checkpoint is a point in the execution history of
1015 the program, which the user may wish to return to at some later time.
1016
1017 Internally, a checkpoint is a saved copy of the program state, including
1018 whatever information is required in order to restore the program to that
1019 state at a later time. This can be expected to include the state of
1020 registers and memory, and may include external state such as the state
1021 of open files and devices.
1022
1023 There are a number of ways in which checkpoints may be implemented
1024 in gdb, e.g.@: as corefiles, as forked processes, and as some opaque
1025 method implemented on the target side.
1026
1027 A corefile can be used to save an image of target memory and register
1028 state, which can in principle be restored later --- but corefiles do
1029 not typically include information about external entities such as
1030 open files. Currently this method is not implemented in gdb.
1031
1032 A forked process can save the state of user memory and registers,
1033 as well as some subset of external (kernel) state. This method
1034 is used to implement checkpoints on Linux, and in principle might
1035 be used on other systems.
1036
1037 Some targets, e.g.@: simulators, might have their own built-in
1038 method for saving checkpoints, and gdb might be able to take
1039 advantage of that capability without necessarily knowing any
1040 details of how it is done.
1041
1042
1043 @section Observing changes in @value{GDBN} internals
1044 @cindex observer pattern interface
1045 @cindex notifications about changes in internals
1046
1047 In order to function properly, several modules need to be notified when
1048 some changes occur in the @value{GDBN} internals. Traditionally, these
1049 modules have relied on several paradigms, the most common ones being
1050 hooks and gdb-events. Unfortunately, none of these paradigms was
1051 versatile enough to become the standard notification mechanism in
1052 @value{GDBN}. The fact that they only supported one ``client'' was also
1053 a strong limitation.
1054
1055 A new paradigm, based on the Observer pattern of the @cite{Design
1056 Patterns} book, has therefore been implemented. The goal was to provide
1057 a new interface overcoming the issues with the notification mechanisms
1058 previously available. This new interface needed to be strongly typed,
1059 easy to extend, and versatile enough to be used as the standard
1060 interface when adding new notifications.
1061
1062 See @ref{GDB Observers} for a brief description of the observers
1063 currently implemented in GDB. The rationale for the current
1064 implementation is also briefly discussed.
1065
1066 @node User Interface
1067
1068 @chapter User Interface
1069
1070 @value{GDBN} has several user interfaces, of which the traditional
1071 command-line interface is perhaps the most familiar.
1072
1073 @section Command Interpreter
1074
1075 @cindex command interpreter
1076 @cindex CLI
1077 The command interpreter in @value{GDBN} is fairly simple. It is designed to
1078 allow for the set of commands to be augmented dynamically, and also
1079 has a recursive subcommand capability, where the first argument to
1080 a command may itself direct a lookup on a different command list.
1081
1082 For instance, the @samp{set} command just starts a lookup on the
1083 @code{setlist} command list, while @samp{set thread} recurses
1084 to the @code{set_thread_cmd_list}.
1085
1086 @findex add_cmd
1087 @findex add_com
1088 To add commands in general, use @code{add_cmd}. @code{add_com} adds to
1089 the main command list, and should be used for those commands. The usual
1090 place to add commands is in the @code{_initialize_@var{xyz}} routines at
1091 the ends of most source files.
1092
1093 @findex add_setshow_cmd
1094 @findex add_setshow_cmd_full
1095 To add paired @samp{set} and @samp{show} commands, use
1096 @code{add_setshow_cmd} or @code{add_setshow_cmd_full}. The former is
1097 a slightly simpler interface which is useful when you don't need to
1098 further modify the new command structures, while the latter returns
1099 the new command structures for manipulation.
1100
1101 @cindex deprecating commands
1102 @findex deprecate_cmd
1103 Before removing commands from the command set it is a good idea to
1104 deprecate them for some time. Use @code{deprecate_cmd} on commands or
1105 aliases to set the deprecated flag. @code{deprecate_cmd} takes a
1106 @code{struct cmd_list_element} as it's first argument. You can use the
1107 return value from @code{add_com} or @code{add_cmd} to deprecate the
1108 command immediately after it is created.
1109
1110 The first time a command is used the user will be warned and offered a
1111 replacement (if one exists). Note that the replacement string passed to
1112 @code{deprecate_cmd} should be the full name of the command, i.e., the
1113 entire string the user should type at the command line.
1114
1115 @anchor{UI-Independent Output}
1116 @section UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out} Functions
1117 @c This section is based on the documentation written by Fernando
1118 @c Nasser <fnasser@redhat.com>.
1119
1120 @cindex @code{ui_out} functions
1121 The @code{ui_out} functions present an abstraction level for the
1122 @value{GDBN} output code. They hide the specifics of different user
1123 interfaces supported by @value{GDBN}, and thus free the programmer
1124 from the need to write several versions of the same code, one each for
1125 every UI, to produce output.
1126
1127 @subsection Overview and Terminology
1128
1129 In general, execution of each @value{GDBN} command produces some sort
1130 of output, and can even generate an input request.
1131
1132 Output can be generated for the following purposes:
1133
1134 @itemize @bullet
1135 @item
1136 to display a @emph{result} of an operation;
1137
1138 @item
1139 to convey @emph{info} or produce side-effects of a requested
1140 operation;
1141
1142 @item
1143 to provide a @emph{notification} of an asynchronous event (including
1144 progress indication of a prolonged asynchronous operation);
1145
1146 @item
1147 to display @emph{error messages} (including warnings);
1148
1149 @item
1150 to show @emph{debug data};
1151
1152 @item
1153 to @emph{query} or prompt a user for input (a special case).
1154 @end itemize
1155
1156 @noindent
1157 This section mainly concentrates on how to build result output,
1158 although some of it also applies to other kinds of output.
1159
1160 Generation of output that displays the results of an operation
1161 involves one or more of the following:
1162
1163 @itemize @bullet
1164 @item
1165 output of the actual data
1166
1167 @item
1168 formatting the output as appropriate for console output, to make it
1169 easily readable by humans
1170
1171 @item
1172 machine oriented formatting--a more terse formatting to allow for easy
1173 parsing by programs which read @value{GDBN}'s output
1174
1175 @item
1176 annotation, whose purpose is to help legacy GUIs to identify interesting
1177 parts in the output
1178 @end itemize
1179
1180 The @code{ui_out} routines take care of the first three aspects.
1181 Annotations are provided by separate annotation routines. Note that use
1182 of annotations for an interface between a GUI and @value{GDBN} is
1183 deprecated.
1184
1185 Output can be in the form of a single item, which we call a @dfn{field};
1186 a @dfn{list} consisting of identical fields; a @dfn{tuple} consisting of
1187 non-identical fields; or a @dfn{table}, which is a tuple consisting of a
1188 header and a body. In a BNF-like form:
1189
1190 @table @code
1191 @item <table> @expansion{}
1192 @code{<header> <body>}
1193 @item <header> @expansion{}
1194 @code{@{ <column> @}}
1195 @item <column> @expansion{}
1196 @code{<width> <alignment> <title>}
1197 @item <body> @expansion{}
1198 @code{@{<row>@}}
1199 @end table
1200
1201
1202 @subsection General Conventions
1203
1204 Most @code{ui_out} routines are of type @code{void}, the exceptions are
1205 @code{ui_out_stream_new} (which returns a pointer to the newly created
1206 object) and the @code{make_cleanup} routines.
1207
1208 The first parameter is always the @code{ui_out} vector object, a pointer
1209 to a @code{struct ui_out}.
1210
1211 The @var{format} parameter is like in @code{printf} family of functions.
1212 When it is present, there must also be a variable list of arguments
1213 sufficient used to satisfy the @code{%} specifiers in the supplied
1214 format.
1215
1216 When a character string argument is not used in a @code{ui_out} function
1217 call, a @code{NULL} pointer has to be supplied instead.
1218
1219
1220 @subsection Table, Tuple and List Functions
1221
1222 @cindex list output functions
1223 @cindex table output functions
1224 @cindex tuple output functions
1225 This section introduces @code{ui_out} routines for building lists,
1226 tuples and tables. The routines to output the actual data items
1227 (fields) are presented in the next section.
1228
1229 To recap: A @dfn{tuple} is a sequence of @dfn{fields}, each field
1230 containing information about an object; a @dfn{list} is a sequence of
1231 fields where each field describes an identical object.
1232
1233 Use the @dfn{table} functions when your output consists of a list of
1234 rows (tuples) and the console output should include a heading. Use this
1235 even when you are listing just one object but you still want the header.
1236
1237 @cindex nesting level in @code{ui_out} functions
1238 Tables can not be nested. Tuples and lists can be nested up to a
1239 maximum of five levels.
1240
1241 The overall structure of the table output code is something like this:
1242
1243 @smallexample
1244 ui_out_table_begin
1245 ui_out_table_header
1246 @dots{}
1247 ui_out_table_body
1248 ui_out_tuple_begin
1249 ui_out_field_*
1250 @dots{}
1251 ui_out_tuple_end
1252 @dots{}
1253 ui_out_table_end
1254 @end smallexample
1255
1256 Here is the description of table-, tuple- and list-related @code{ui_out}
1257 functions:
1258
1259 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nbrofcols}, int @var{nr_rows}, const char *@var{tblid})
1260 The function @code{ui_out_table_begin} marks the beginning of the output
1261 of a table. It should always be called before any other @code{ui_out}
1262 function for a given table. @var{nbrofcols} is the number of columns in
1263 the table. @var{nr_rows} is the number of rows in the table.
1264 @var{tblid} is an optional string identifying the table. The string
1265 pointed to by @var{tblid} is copied by the implementation of
1266 @code{ui_out_table_begin}, so the application can free the string if it
1267 was @code{malloc}ed.
1268
1269 The companion function @code{ui_out_table_end}, described below, marks
1270 the end of the table's output.
1271 @end deftypefun
1272
1273 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_header (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{colhdr})
1274 @code{ui_out_table_header} provides the header information for a single
1275 table column. You call this function several times, one each for every
1276 column of the table, after @code{ui_out_table_begin}, but before
1277 @code{ui_out_table_body}.
1278
1279 The value of @var{width} gives the column width in characters. The
1280 value of @var{alignment} is one of @code{left}, @code{center}, and
1281 @code{right}, and it specifies how to align the header: left-justify,
1282 center, or right-justify it. @var{colhdr} points to a string that
1283 specifies the column header; the implementation copies that string, so
1284 column header strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed after the
1285 call.
1286 @end deftypefun
1287
1288 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_body (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1289 This function delimits the table header from the table body.
1290 @end deftypefun
1291
1292 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1293 This function signals the end of a table's output. It should be called
1294 after the table body has been produced by the list and field output
1295 functions.
1296
1297 There should be exactly one call to @code{ui_out_table_end} for each
1298 call to @code{ui_out_table_begin}, otherwise the @code{ui_out} functions
1299 will signal an internal error.
1300 @end deftypefun
1301
1302 The output of the tuples that represent the table rows must follow the
1303 call to @code{ui_out_table_body} and precede the call to
1304 @code{ui_out_table_end}. You build a tuple by calling
1305 @code{ui_out_tuple_begin} and @code{ui_out_tuple_end}, with suitable
1306 calls to functions which actually output fields between them.
1307
1308 @deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1309 This function marks the beginning of a tuple output. @var{id} points
1310 to an optional string that identifies the tuple; it is copied by the
1311 implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1312 after the call.
1313 @end deftypefun
1314
1315 @deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1316 This function signals an end of a tuple output. There should be exactly
1317 one call to @code{ui_out_tuple_end} for each call to
1318 @code{ui_out_tuple_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1319 be signaled.
1320 @end deftypefun
1321
1322 @deftypefun {struct cleanup *} make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1323 This function first opens the tuple and then establishes a cleanup
1324 (@pxref{Misc Guidelines, Cleanups}) to close the tuple.
1325 It provides a convenient and correct implementation of the
1326 non-portable@footnote{The function cast is not portable ISO C.} code sequence:
1327 @smallexample
1328 struct cleanup *old_cleanup;
1329 ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "...");
1330 old_cleanup = make_cleanup ((void(*)(void *)) ui_out_tuple_end,
1331 uiout);
1332 @end smallexample
1333 @end deftypefun
1334
1335 @deftypefun void ui_out_list_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1336 This function marks the beginning of a list output. @var{id} points to
1337 an optional string that identifies the list; it is copied by the
1338 implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1339 after the call.
1340 @end deftypefun
1341
1342 @deftypefun void ui_out_list_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1343 This function signals an end of a list output. There should be exactly
1344 one call to @code{ui_out_list_end} for each call to
1345 @code{ui_out_list_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1346 be signaled.
1347 @end deftypefun
1348
1349 @deftypefun {struct cleanup *} make_cleanup_ui_out_list_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1350 Similar to @code{make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end}, this function
1351 opens a list and then establishes cleanup
1352 (@pxref{Misc Guidelines, Cleanups})
1353 that will close the list.
1354 @end deftypefun
1355
1356 @subsection Item Output Functions
1357
1358 @cindex item output functions
1359 @cindex field output functions
1360 @cindex data output
1361 The functions described below produce output for the actual data
1362 items, or fields, which contain information about the object.
1363
1364 Choose the appropriate function accordingly to your particular needs.
1365
1366 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{fldname}, char *@var{format}, ...)
1367 This is the most general output function. It produces the
1368 representation of the data in the variable-length argument list
1369 according to formatting specifications in @var{format}, a
1370 @code{printf}-like format string. The optional argument @var{fldname}
1371 supplies the name of the field. The data items themselves are
1372 supplied as additional arguments after @var{format}.
1373
1374 This generic function should be used only when it is not possible to
1375 use one of the specialized versions (see below).
1376 @end deftypefun
1377
1378 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1379 This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable. It uses the
1380 @code{"%d"} output conversion specification. @var{fldname} specifies
1381 the name of the field.
1382 @end deftypefun
1383
1384 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1385 This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable. It differs from
1386 @code{ui_out_field_int} in that the caller specifies the desired @var{width} and @var{alignment} of the output.
1387 @var{fldname} specifies
1388 the name of the field.
1389 @end deftypefun
1390
1391 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_core_addr (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
1392 This function outputs an address as appropriate for @var{gdbarch}.
1393 @end deftypefun
1394
1395 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_string (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, const char *@var{string})
1396 This function outputs a string using the @code{"%s"} conversion
1397 specification.
1398 @end deftypefun
1399
1400 Sometimes, there's a need to compose your output piece by piece using
1401 functions that operate on a stream, such as @code{value_print} or
1402 @code{fprintf_symbol_filtered}. These functions accept an argument of
1403 the type @code{struct ui_file *}, a pointer to a @code{ui_file} object
1404 used to store the data stream used for the output. When you use one
1405 of these functions, you need a way to pass their results stored in a
1406 @code{ui_file} object to the @code{ui_out} functions. To this end,
1407 you first create a @code{ui_stream} object by calling
1408 @code{ui_out_stream_new}, pass the @code{stream} member of that
1409 @code{ui_stream} object to @code{value_print} and similar functions,
1410 and finally call @code{ui_out_field_stream} to output the field you
1411 constructed. When the @code{ui_stream} object is no longer needed,
1412 you should destroy it and free its memory by calling
1413 @code{ui_out_stream_delete}.
1414
1415 @deftypefun {struct ui_stream *} ui_out_stream_new (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1416 This function creates a new @code{ui_stream} object which uses the
1417 same output methods as the @code{ui_out} object whose pointer is
1418 passed in @var{uiout}. It returns a pointer to the newly created
1419 @code{ui_stream} object.
1420 @end deftypefun
1421
1422 @deftypefun void ui_out_stream_delete (struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1423 This functions destroys a @code{ui_stream} object specified by
1424 @var{streambuf}.
1425 @end deftypefun
1426
1427 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_stream (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fieldname}, struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1428 This function consumes all the data accumulated in
1429 @code{streambuf->stream} and outputs it like
1430 @code{ui_out_field_string} does. After a call to
1431 @code{ui_out_field_stream}, the accumulated data no longer exists, but
1432 the stream is still valid and may be used for producing more fields.
1433 @end deftypefun
1434
1435 @strong{Important:} If there is any chance that your code could bail
1436 out before completing output generation and reaching the point where
1437 @code{ui_out_stream_delete} is called, it is necessary to set up a
1438 cleanup, to avoid leaking memory and other resources. Here's a
1439 skeleton code to do that:
1440
1441 @smallexample
1442 struct ui_stream *mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1443 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1444 ...
1445 do_cleanups (old);
1446 @end smallexample
1447
1448 If the function already has the old cleanup chain set (for other kinds
1449 of cleanups), you just have to add your cleanup to it:
1450
1451 @smallexample
1452 mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1453 make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1454 @end smallexample
1455
1456 Note that with cleanups in place, you should not call
1457 @code{ui_out_stream_delete} directly, or you would attempt to free the
1458 same buffer twice.
1459
1460 @subsection Utility Output Functions
1461
1462 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_skip (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname})
1463 This function skips a field in a table. Use it if you have to leave
1464 an empty field without disrupting the table alignment. The argument
1465 @var{fldname} specifies a name for the (missing) filed.
1466 @end deftypefun
1467
1468 @deftypefun void ui_out_text (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{string})
1469 This function outputs the text in @var{string} in a way that makes it
1470 easy to be read by humans. For example, the console implementation of
1471 this method filters the text through a built-in pager, to prevent it
1472 from scrolling off the visible portion of the screen.
1473
1474 Use this function for printing relatively long chunks of text around
1475 the actual field data: the text it produces is not aligned according
1476 to the table's format. Use @code{ui_out_field_string} to output a
1477 string field, and use @code{ui_out_message}, described below, to
1478 output short messages.
1479 @end deftypefun
1480
1481 @deftypefun void ui_out_spaces (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nspaces})
1482 This function outputs @var{nspaces} spaces. It is handy to align the
1483 text produced by @code{ui_out_text} with the rest of the table or
1484 list.
1485 @end deftypefun
1486
1487 @deftypefun void ui_out_message (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{verbosity}, const char *@var{format}, ...)
1488 This function produces a formatted message, provided that the current
1489 verbosity level is at least as large as given by @var{verbosity}. The
1490 current verbosity level is specified by the user with the @samp{set
1491 verbositylevel} command.@footnote{As of this writing (April 2001),
1492 setting verbosity level is not yet implemented, and is always returned
1493 as zero. So calling @code{ui_out_message} with a @var{verbosity}
1494 argument more than zero will cause the message to never be printed.}
1495 @end deftypefun
1496
1497 @deftypefun void ui_out_wrap_hint (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{indent})
1498 This function gives the console output filter (a paging filter) a hint
1499 of where to break lines which are too long. Ignored for all other
1500 output consumers. @var{indent}, if non-@code{NULL}, is the string to
1501 be printed to indent the wrapped text on the next line; it must remain
1502 accessible until the next call to @code{ui_out_wrap_hint}, or until an
1503 explicit newline is produced by one of the other functions. If
1504 @var{indent} is @code{NULL}, the wrapped text will not be indented.
1505 @end deftypefun
1506
1507 @deftypefun void ui_out_flush (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1508 This function flushes whatever output has been accumulated so far, if
1509 the UI buffers output.
1510 @end deftypefun
1511
1512
1513 @subsection Examples of Use of @code{ui_out} functions
1514
1515 @cindex using @code{ui_out} functions
1516 @cindex @code{ui_out} functions, usage examples
1517 This section gives some practical examples of using the @code{ui_out}
1518 functions to generalize the old console-oriented code in
1519 @value{GDBN}. The examples all come from functions defined on the
1520 @file{breakpoints.c} file.
1521
1522 This example, from the @code{breakpoint_1} function, shows how to
1523 produce a table.
1524
1525 The original code was:
1526
1527 @smallexample
1528 if (!found_a_breakpoint++)
1529 @{
1530 annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1531
1532 annotate_field (0);
1533 printf_filtered ("Num ");
1534 annotate_field (1);
1535 printf_filtered ("Type ");
1536 annotate_field (2);
1537 printf_filtered ("Disp ");
1538 annotate_field (3);
1539 printf_filtered ("Enb ");
1540 if (addressprint)
1541 @{
1542 annotate_field (4);
1543 printf_filtered ("Address ");
1544 @}
1545 annotate_field (5);
1546 printf_filtered ("What\n");
1547
1548 annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1549 @}
1550 @end smallexample
1551
1552 Here's the new version:
1553
1554 @smallexample
1555 nr_printable_breakpoints = @dots{};
1556
1557 if (addressprint)
1558 ui_out_table_begin (ui, 6, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1559 else
1560 ui_out_table_begin (ui, 5, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1561
1562 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1563 annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1564 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1565 annotate_field (0);
1566 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "number", "Num"); /* 1 */
1567 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1568 annotate_field (1);
1569 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 14, ui_left, "type", "Type"); /* 2 */
1570 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1571 annotate_field (2);
1572 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 4, ui_left, "disp", "Disp"); /* 3 */
1573 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1574 annotate_field (3);
1575 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "enabled", "Enb"); /* 4 */
1576 if (addressprint)
1577 @{
1578 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1579 annotate_field (4);
1580 if (print_address_bits <= 32)
1581 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 10, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1582 else
1583 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 18, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1584 @}
1585 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1586 annotate_field (5);
1587 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 40, ui_noalign, "what", "What"); /* 6 */
1588 ui_out_table_body (uiout);
1589 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1590 annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1591 @end smallexample
1592
1593 This example, from the @code{print_one_breakpoint} function, shows how
1594 to produce the actual data for the table whose structure was defined
1595 in the above example. The original code was:
1596
1597 @smallexample
1598 annotate_record ();
1599 annotate_field (0);
1600 printf_filtered ("%-3d ", b->number);
1601 annotate_field (1);
1602 if ((int)b->type > (sizeof(bptypes)/sizeof(bptypes[0]))
1603 || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1604 internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1605 (int)b->type);
1606 printf_filtered ("%-14s ", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1607 annotate_field (2);
1608 printf_filtered ("%-4s ", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1609 annotate_field (3);
1610 printf_filtered ("%-3c ", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1611 @dots{}
1612 @end smallexample
1613
1614 This is the new version:
1615
1616 @smallexample
1617 annotate_record ();
1618 ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "bkpt");
1619 annotate_field (0);
1620 ui_out_field_int (uiout, "number", b->number);
1621 annotate_field (1);
1622 if (((int) b->type > (sizeof (bptypes) / sizeof (bptypes[0])))
1623 || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1624 internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1625 (int) b->type);
1626 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "type", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1627 annotate_field (2);
1628 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "disp", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1629 annotate_field (3);
1630 ui_out_field_fmt (uiout, "enabled", "%c", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1631 @dots{}
1632 @end smallexample
1633
1634 This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to
1635 produce a complicated output field using the @code{print_expression}
1636 functions which requires a stream to be passed. It also shows how to
1637 automate stream destruction with cleanups. The original code was:
1638
1639 @smallexample
1640 annotate_field (5);
1641 print_expression (b->exp, gdb_stdout);
1642 @end smallexample
1643
1644 The new version is:
1645
1646 @smallexample
1647 struct ui_stream *stb = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1648 struct cleanup *old_chain = make_cleanup_ui_out_stream_delete (stb);
1649 ...
1650 annotate_field (5);
1651 print_expression (b->exp, stb->stream);
1652 ui_out_field_stream (uiout, "what", local_stream);
1653 @end smallexample
1654
1655 This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to use
1656 @code{ui_out_text} and @code{ui_out_field_string}. The original code
1657 was:
1658
1659 @smallexample
1660 annotate_field (5);
1661 if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1662 printf_filtered ("<any library> ");
1663 else
1664 printf_filtered ("library \"%s\" ", b->dll_pathname);
1665 @end smallexample
1666
1667 It became:
1668
1669 @smallexample
1670 annotate_field (5);
1671 if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1672 @{
1673 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", "<any library>");
1674 ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1675 @}
1676 else
1677 @{
1678 ui_out_text (uiout, "library \"");
1679 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->dll_pathname);
1680 ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1681 @}
1682 @end smallexample
1683
1684 The following example from @code{print_one_breakpoint} shows how to
1685 use @code{ui_out_field_int} and @code{ui_out_spaces}. The original
1686 code was:
1687
1688 @smallexample
1689 annotate_field (5);
1690 if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1691 printf_filtered ("process %d ", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1692 @end smallexample
1693
1694 It became:
1695
1696 @smallexample
1697 annotate_field (5);
1698 if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1699 @{
1700 ui_out_text (uiout, "process ");
1701 ui_out_field_int (uiout, "what", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1702 ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1703 @}
1704 @end smallexample
1705
1706 Here's an example of using @code{ui_out_field_string}. The original
1707 code was:
1708
1709 @smallexample
1710 annotate_field (5);
1711 if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1712 printf_filtered ("program \"%s\" ", b->exec_pathname);
1713 @end smallexample
1714
1715 It became:
1716
1717 @smallexample
1718 annotate_field (5);
1719 if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1720 @{
1721 ui_out_text (uiout, "program \"");
1722 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->exec_pathname);
1723 ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1724 @}
1725 @end smallexample
1726
1727 Finally, here's an example of printing an address. The original code:
1728
1729 @smallexample
1730 annotate_field (4);
1731 printf_filtered ("%s ",
1732 hex_string_custom ((unsigned long) b->address, 8));
1733 @end smallexample
1734
1735 It became:
1736
1737 @smallexample
1738 annotate_field (4);
1739 ui_out_field_core_addr (uiout, "Address", b->address);
1740 @end smallexample
1741
1742
1743 @section Console Printing
1744
1745 @section TUI
1746
1747 @node libgdb
1748
1749 @chapter libgdb
1750
1751 @section libgdb 1.0
1752 @cindex @code{libgdb}
1753 @code{libgdb} 1.0 was an abortive project of years ago. The theory was
1754 to provide an API to @value{GDBN}'s functionality.
1755
1756 @section libgdb 2.0
1757 @cindex @code{libgdb}
1758 @code{libgdb} 2.0 is an ongoing effort to update @value{GDBN} so that is
1759 better able to support graphical and other environments.
1760
1761 Since @code{libgdb} development is on-going, its architecture is still
1762 evolving. The following components have so far been identified:
1763
1764 @itemize @bullet
1765 @item
1766 Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}.
1767 @item
1768 Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1769 @item
1770 Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1771 @item
1772 Library - @file{gdb.h}
1773 @end itemize
1774
1775 The model that ties these components together is described below.
1776
1777 @section The @code{libgdb} Model
1778
1779 A client of @code{libgdb} interacts with the library in two ways.
1780
1781 @itemize @bullet
1782 @item
1783 As an observer (using @file{gdb-events}) receiving notifications from
1784 @code{libgdb} of any internal state changes (break point changes, run
1785 state, etc).
1786 @item
1787 As a client querying @code{libgdb} (using the @file{ui-out} builder) to
1788 obtain various status values from @value{GDBN}.
1789 @end itemize
1790
1791 Since @code{libgdb} could have multiple clients (e.g., a GUI supporting
1792 the existing @value{GDBN} CLI), those clients must co-operate when
1793 controlling @code{libgdb}. In particular, a client must ensure that
1794 @code{libgdb} is idle (i.e.@: no other client is using @code{libgdb})
1795 before responding to a @file{gdb-event} by making a query.
1796
1797 @section CLI support
1798
1799 At present @value{GDBN}'s CLI is very much entangled in with the core of
1800 @code{libgdb}. Consequently, a client wishing to include the CLI in
1801 their interface needs to carefully co-ordinate its own and the CLI's
1802 requirements.
1803
1804 It is suggested that the client set @code{libgdb} up to be bi-modal
1805 (alternate between CLI and client query modes). The notes below sketch
1806 out the theory:
1807
1808 @itemize @bullet
1809 @item
1810 The client registers itself as an observer of @code{libgdb}.
1811 @item
1812 The client create and install @code{cli-out} builder using its own
1813 versions of the @code{ui-file} @code{gdb_stderr}, @code{gdb_stdtarg} and
1814 @code{gdb_stdout} streams.
1815 @item
1816 The client creates a separate custom @code{ui-out} builder that is only
1817 used while making direct queries to @code{libgdb}.
1818 @end itemize
1819
1820 When the client receives input intended for the CLI, it simply passes it
1821 along. Since the @code{cli-out} builder is installed by default, all
1822 the CLI output in response to that command is routed (pronounced rooted)
1823 through to the client controlled @code{gdb_stdout} et.@: al.@: streams.
1824 At the same time, the client is kept abreast of internal changes by
1825 virtue of being a @code{libgdb} observer.
1826
1827 The only restriction on the client is that it must wait until
1828 @code{libgdb} becomes idle before initiating any queries (using the
1829 client's custom builder).
1830
1831 @section @code{libgdb} components
1832
1833 @subheading Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}
1834 @file{gdb-events} provides the client with a very raw mechanism that can
1835 be used to implement an observer. At present it only allows for one
1836 observer and that observer must, internally, handle the need to delay
1837 the processing of any event notifications until after @code{libgdb} has
1838 finished the current command.
1839
1840 @subheading Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1841 @file{ui-out} provides the infrastructure necessary for a client to
1842 create a builder. That builder is then passed down to @code{libgdb}
1843 when doing any queries.
1844
1845 @subheading Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1846 @c There could be an entire section on the event-loop
1847 @file{event-loop}, currently non-re-entrant, provides a simple event
1848 loop. A client would need to either plug its self into this loop or,
1849 implement a new event-loop that @value{GDBN} would use.
1850
1851 The event-loop will eventually be made re-entrant. This is so that
1852 @value{GDBN} can better handle the problem of some commands blocking
1853 instead of returning.
1854
1855 @subheading Library - @file{gdb.h}
1856 @file{libgdb} is the most obvious component of this system. It provides
1857 the query interface. Each function is parameterized by a @code{ui-out}
1858 builder. The result of the query is constructed using that builder
1859 before the query function returns.
1860
1861 @node Values
1862 @chapter Values
1863 @section Values
1864
1865 @cindex values
1866 @cindex @code{value} structure
1867 @value{GDBN} uses @code{struct value}, or @dfn{values}, as an internal
1868 abstraction for the representation of a variety of inferior objects
1869 and @value{GDBN} convenience objects.
1870
1871 Values have an associated @code{struct type}, that describes a virtual
1872 view of the raw data or object stored in or accessed through the
1873 value.
1874
1875 A value is in addition discriminated by its lvalue-ness, given its
1876 @code{enum lval_type} enumeration type:
1877
1878 @cindex @code{lval_type} enumeration, for values.
1879 @table @code
1880 @item @code{not_lval}
1881 This value is not an lval. It can't be assigned to.
1882
1883 @item @code{lval_memory}
1884 This value represents an object in memory.
1885
1886 @item @code{lval_register}
1887 This value represents an object that lives in a register.
1888
1889 @item @code{lval_internalvar}
1890 Represents the value of an internal variable.
1891
1892 @item @code{lval_internalvar_component}
1893 Represents part of a @value{GDBN} internal variable. E.g., a
1894 structure field.
1895
1896 @cindex computed values
1897 @item @code{lval_computed}
1898 These are ``computed'' values. They allow creating specialized value
1899 objects for specific purposes, all abstracted away from the core value
1900 support code. The creator of such a value writes specialized
1901 functions to handle the reading and writing to/from the value's
1902 backend data, and optionally, a ``copy operator'' and a
1903 ``destructor''.
1904
1905 Pointers to these functions are stored in a @code{struct lval_funcs}
1906 instance (declared in @file{value.h}), and passed to the
1907 @code{allocate_computed_value} function, as in the example below.
1908
1909 @smallexample
1910 static void
1911 nil_value_read (struct value *v)
1912 @{
1913 /* This callback reads data from some backend, and stores it in V.
1914 In this case, we always read null data. You'll want to fill in
1915 something more interesting. */
1916
1917 memset (value_contents_all_raw (v),
1918 value_offset (v),
1919 TYPE_LENGTH (value_type (v)));
1920 @}
1921
1922 static void
1923 nil_value_write (struct value *v, struct value *fromval)
1924 @{
1925 /* Takes the data from FROMVAL and stores it in the backend of V. */
1926
1927 to_oblivion (value_contents_all_raw (fromval),
1928 value_offset (v),
1929 TYPE_LENGTH (value_type (fromval)));
1930 @}
1931
1932 static struct lval_funcs nil_value_funcs =
1933 @{
1934 nil_value_read,
1935 nil_value_write
1936 @};
1937
1938 struct value *
1939 make_nil_value (void)
1940 @{
1941 struct type *type;
1942 struct value *v;
1943
1944 type = make_nils_type ();
1945 v = allocate_computed_value (type, &nil_value_funcs, NULL);
1946
1947 return v;
1948 @}
1949 @end smallexample
1950
1951 See the implementation of the @code{$_siginfo} convenience variable in
1952 @file{infrun.c} as a real example use of lval_computed.
1953
1954 @end table
1955
1956 @node Stack Frames
1957 @chapter Stack Frames
1958
1959 @cindex frame
1960 @cindex call stack frame
1961 A frame is a construct that @value{GDBN} uses to keep track of calling
1962 and called functions.
1963
1964 @cindex unwind frame
1965 @value{GDBN}'s frame model, a fresh design, was implemented with the
1966 need to support @sc{dwarf}'s Call Frame Information in mind. In fact,
1967 the term ``unwind'' is taken directly from that specification.
1968 Developers wishing to learn more about unwinders, are encouraged to
1969 read the @sc{dwarf} specification, available from
1970 @url{http://www.dwarfstd.org}.
1971
1972 @findex frame_register_unwind
1973 @findex get_frame_register
1974 @value{GDBN}'s model is that you find a frame's registers by
1975 ``unwinding'' them from the next younger frame. That is,
1976 @samp{get_frame_register} which returns the value of a register in
1977 frame #1 (the next-to-youngest frame), is implemented by calling frame
1978 #0's @code{frame_register_unwind} (the youngest frame). But then the
1979 obvious question is: how do you access the registers of the youngest
1980 frame itself?
1981
1982 @cindex sentinel frame
1983 @findex get_frame_type
1984 @vindex SENTINEL_FRAME
1985 To answer this question, @value{GDBN} has the @dfn{sentinel} frame, the
1986 ``-1st'' frame. Unwinding registers from the sentinel frame gives you
1987 the current values of the youngest real frame's registers. If @var{f}
1988 is a sentinel frame, then @code{get_frame_type (@var{f}) @equiv{}
1989 SENTINEL_FRAME}.
1990
1991 @section Selecting an Unwinder
1992
1993 @findex frame_unwind_prepend_unwinder
1994 @findex frame_unwind_append_unwinder
1995 The architecture registers a list of frame unwinders (@code{struct
1996 frame_unwind}), using the functions
1997 @code{frame_unwind_prepend_unwinder} and
1998 @code{frame_unwind_append_unwinder}. Each unwinder includes a
1999 sniffer. Whenever @value{GDBN} needs to unwind a frame (to fetch the
2000 previous frame's registers or the current frame's ID), it calls
2001 registered sniffers in order to find one which recognizes the frame.
2002 The first time a sniffer returns non-zero, the corresponding unwinder
2003 is assigned to the frame.
2004
2005 @section Unwinding the Frame ID
2006 @cindex frame ID
2007
2008 Every frame has an associated ID, of type @code{struct frame_id}.
2009 The ID includes the stack base and function start address for
2010 the frame. The ID persists through the entire life of the frame,
2011 including while other called frames are running; it is used to
2012 locate an appropriate @code{struct frame_info} from the cache.
2013
2014 Every time the inferior stops, and at various other times, the frame
2015 cache is flushed. Because of this, parts of @value{GDBN} which need
2016 to keep track of individual frames cannot use pointers to @code{struct
2017 frame_info}. A frame ID provides a stable reference to a frame, even
2018 when the unwinder must be run again to generate a new @code{struct
2019 frame_info} for the same frame.
2020
2021 The frame's unwinder's @code{this_id} method is called to find the ID.
2022 Note that this is different from register unwinding, where the next
2023 frame's @code{prev_register} is called to unwind this frame's
2024 registers.
2025
2026 Both stack base and function address are required to identify the
2027 frame, because a recursive function has the same function address for
2028 two consecutive frames and a leaf function may have the same stack
2029 address as its caller. On some platforms, a third address is part of
2030 the ID to further disambiguate frames---for instance, on IA-64
2031 the separate register stack address is included in the ID.
2032
2033 An invalid frame ID (@code{outer_frame_id}) returned from the
2034 @code{this_id} method means to stop unwinding after this frame.
2035
2036 @code{null_frame_id} is another invalid frame ID which should be used
2037 when there is no frame. For instance, certain breakpoints are attached
2038 to a specific frame, and that frame is identified through its frame ID
2039 (we use this to implement the "finish" command). Using
2040 @code{null_frame_id} as the frame ID for a given breakpoint means
2041 that the breakpoint is not specific to any frame. The @code{this_id}
2042 method should never return @code{null_frame_id}.
2043
2044 @section Unwinding Registers
2045
2046 Each unwinder includes a @code{prev_register} method. This method
2047 takes a frame, an associated cache pointer, and a register number.
2048 It returns a @code{struct value *} describing the requested register,
2049 as saved by this frame. This is the value of the register that is
2050 current in this frame's caller.
2051
2052 The returned value must have the same type as the register. It may
2053 have any lvalue type. In most circumstances one of these routines
2054 will generate the appropriate value:
2055
2056 @table @code
2057 @item frame_unwind_got_optimized
2058 @findex frame_unwind_got_optimized
2059 This register was not saved.
2060
2061 @item frame_unwind_got_register
2062 @findex frame_unwind_got_register
2063 This register was copied into another register in this frame. This
2064 is also used for unchanged registers; they are ``copied'' into the
2065 same register.
2066
2067 @item frame_unwind_got_memory
2068 @findex frame_unwind_got_memory
2069 This register was saved in memory.
2070
2071 @item frame_unwind_got_constant
2072 @findex frame_unwind_got_constant
2073 This register was not saved, but the unwinder can compute the previous
2074 value some other way.
2075
2076 @item frame_unwind_got_address
2077 @findex frame_unwind_got_address
2078 Same as @code{frame_unwind_got_constant}, except that the value is a target
2079 address. This is frequently used for the stack pointer, which is not
2080 explicitly saved but has a known offset from this frame's stack
2081 pointer. For architectures with a flat unified address space, this is
2082 generally the same as @code{frame_unwind_got_constant}.
2083 @end table
2084
2085 @node Symbol Handling
2086
2087 @chapter Symbol Handling
2088
2089 Symbols are a key part of @value{GDBN}'s operation. Symbols include
2090 variables, functions, and types.
2091
2092 Symbol information for a large program can be truly massive, and
2093 reading of symbol information is one of the major performance
2094 bottlenecks in @value{GDBN}; it can take many minutes to process it
2095 all. Studies have shown that nearly all the time spent is
2096 computational, rather than file reading.
2097
2098 One of the ways for @value{GDBN} to provide a good user experience is
2099 to start up quickly, taking no more than a few seconds. It is simply
2100 not possible to process all of a program's debugging info in that
2101 time, and so we attempt to handle symbols incrementally. For instance,
2102 we create @dfn{partial symbol tables} consisting of only selected
2103 symbols, and only expand them to full symbol tables when necessary.
2104
2105 @section Symbol Reading
2106
2107 @cindex symbol reading
2108 @cindex reading of symbols
2109 @cindex symbol files
2110 @value{GDBN} reads symbols from @dfn{symbol files}. The usual symbol
2111 file is the file containing the program which @value{GDBN} is
2112 debugging. @value{GDBN} can be directed to use a different file for
2113 symbols (with the @samp{symbol-file} command), and it can also read
2114 more symbols via the @samp{add-file} and @samp{load} commands. In
2115 addition, it may bring in more symbols while loading shared
2116 libraries.
2117
2118 @findex find_sym_fns
2119 Symbol files are initially opened by code in @file{symfile.c} using
2120 the BFD library (@pxref{Support Libraries}). BFD identifies the type
2121 of the file by examining its header. @code{find_sym_fns} then uses
2122 this identification to locate a set of symbol-reading functions.
2123
2124 @findex add_symtab_fns
2125 @cindex @code{sym_fns} structure
2126 @cindex adding a symbol-reading module
2127 Symbol-reading modules identify themselves to @value{GDBN} by calling
2128 @code{add_symtab_fns} during their module initialization. The argument
2129 to @code{add_symtab_fns} is a @code{struct sym_fns} which contains the
2130 name (or name prefix) of the symbol format, the length of the prefix,
2131 and pointers to four functions. These functions are called at various
2132 times to process symbol files whose identification matches the specified
2133 prefix.
2134
2135 The functions supplied by each module are:
2136
2137 @table @code
2138 @item @var{xyz}_symfile_init(struct sym_fns *sf)
2139
2140 @cindex secondary symbol file
2141 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when we are about to read a new
2142 symbol file. This function should clean up any internal state (possibly
2143 resulting from half-read previous files, for example) and prepare to
2144 read a new symbol file. Note that the symbol file which we are reading
2145 might be a new ``main'' symbol file, or might be a secondary symbol file
2146 whose symbols are being added to the existing symbol table.
2147
2148 The argument to @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init} is a newly allocated
2149 @code{struct sym_fns} whose @code{bfd} field contains the BFD for the
2150 new symbol file being read. Its @code{private} field has been zeroed,
2151 and can be modified as desired. Typically, a struct of private
2152 information will be @code{malloc}'d, and a pointer to it will be placed
2153 in the @code{private} field.
2154
2155 There is no result from @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, but it can call
2156 @code{error} if it detects an unavoidable problem.
2157
2158 @item @var{xyz}_new_init()
2159
2160 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when discarding existing symbols.
2161 This function needs only handle the symbol-reading module's internal
2162 state; the symbol table data structures visible to the rest of
2163 @value{GDBN} will be discarded by @code{symbol_file_add}. It has no
2164 arguments and no result. It may be called after
2165 @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, if a new symbol table is being read, or
2166 may be called alone if all symbols are simply being discarded.
2167
2168 @item @var{xyz}_symfile_read(struct sym_fns *sf, CORE_ADDR addr, int mainline)
2169
2170 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} to actually read the symbols from a
2171 symbol-file into a set of psymtabs or symtabs.
2172
2173 @code{sf} points to the @code{struct sym_fns} originally passed to
2174 @code{@var{xyz}_sym_init} for possible initialization. @code{addr} is
2175 the offset between the file's specified start address and its true
2176 address in memory. @code{mainline} is 1 if this is the main symbol
2177 table being read, and 0 if a secondary symbol file (e.g., shared library
2178 or dynamically loaded file) is being read.@refill
2179 @end table
2180
2181 In addition, if a symbol-reading module creates psymtabs when
2182 @var{xyz}_symfile_read is called, these psymtabs will contain a pointer
2183 to a function @code{@var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab}, which can be called
2184 from any point in the @value{GDBN} symbol-handling code.
2185
2186 @table @code
2187 @item @var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab (struct partial_symtab *pst)
2188
2189 Called from @code{psymtab_to_symtab} (or the @code{PSYMTAB_TO_SYMTAB} macro) if
2190 the psymtab has not already been read in and had its @code{pst->symtab}
2191 pointer set. The argument is the psymtab to be fleshed-out into a
2192 symtab. Upon return, @code{pst->readin} should have been set to 1, and
2193 @code{pst->symtab} should contain a pointer to the new corresponding symtab, or
2194 zero if there were no symbols in that part of the symbol file.
2195 @end table
2196
2197 @section Partial Symbol Tables
2198
2199 @value{GDBN} has three types of symbol tables:
2200
2201 @itemize @bullet
2202 @cindex full symbol table
2203 @cindex symtabs
2204 @item
2205 Full symbol tables (@dfn{symtabs}). These contain the main
2206 information about symbols and addresses.
2207
2208 @cindex psymtabs
2209 @item
2210 Partial symbol tables (@dfn{psymtabs}). These contain enough
2211 information to know when to read the corresponding part of the full
2212 symbol table.
2213
2214 @cindex minimal symbol table
2215 @cindex minsymtabs
2216 @item
2217 Minimal symbol tables (@dfn{msymtabs}). These contain information
2218 gleaned from non-debugging symbols.
2219 @end itemize
2220
2221 @cindex partial symbol table
2222 This section describes partial symbol tables.
2223
2224 A psymtab is constructed by doing a very quick pass over an executable
2225 file's debugging information. Small amounts of information are
2226 extracted---enough to identify which parts of the symbol table will
2227 need to be re-read and fully digested later, when the user needs the
2228 information. The speed of this pass causes @value{GDBN} to start up very
2229 quickly. Later, as the detailed rereading occurs, it occurs in small
2230 pieces, at various times, and the delay therefrom is mostly invisible to
2231 the user.
2232 @c (@xref{Symbol Reading}.)
2233
2234 The symbols that show up in a file's psymtab should be, roughly, those
2235 visible to the debugger's user when the program is not running code from
2236 that file. These include external symbols and types, static symbols and
2237 types, and @code{enum} values declared at file scope.
2238
2239 The psymtab also contains the range of instruction addresses that the
2240 full symbol table would represent.
2241
2242 @cindex finding a symbol
2243 @cindex symbol lookup
2244 The idea is that there are only two ways for the user (or much of the
2245 code in the debugger) to reference a symbol:
2246
2247 @itemize @bullet
2248 @findex find_pc_function
2249 @findex find_pc_line
2250 @item
2251 By its address (e.g., execution stops at some address which is inside a
2252 function in this file). The address will be noticed to be in the
2253 range of this psymtab, and the full symtab will be read in.
2254 @code{find_pc_function}, @code{find_pc_line}, and other
2255 @code{find_pc_@dots{}} functions handle this.
2256
2257 @cindex lookup_symbol
2258 @item
2259 By its name
2260 (e.g., the user asks to print a variable, or set a breakpoint on a
2261 function). Global names and file-scope names will be found in the
2262 psymtab, which will cause the symtab to be pulled in. Local names will
2263 have to be qualified by a global name, or a file-scope name, in which
2264 case we will have already read in the symtab as we evaluated the
2265 qualifier. Or, a local symbol can be referenced when we are ``in'' a
2266 local scope, in which case the first case applies. @code{lookup_symbol}
2267 does most of the work here.
2268 @end itemize
2269
2270 The only reason that psymtabs exist is to cause a symtab to be read in
2271 at the right moment. Any symbol that can be elided from a psymtab,
2272 while still causing that to happen, should not appear in it. Since
2273 psymtabs don't have the idea of scope, you can't put local symbols in
2274 them anyway. Psymtabs don't have the idea of the type of a symbol,
2275 either, so types need not appear, unless they will be referenced by
2276 name.
2277
2278 It is a bug for @value{GDBN} to behave one way when only a psymtab has
2279 been read, and another way if the corresponding symtab has been read
2280 in. Such bugs are typically caused by a psymtab that does not contain
2281 all the visible symbols, or which has the wrong instruction address
2282 ranges.
2283
2284 The psymtab for a particular section of a symbol file (objfile) could be
2285 thrown away after the symtab has been read in. The symtab should always
2286 be searched before the psymtab, so the psymtab will never be used (in a
2287 bug-free environment). Currently, psymtabs are allocated on an obstack,
2288 and all the psymbols themselves are allocated in a pair of large arrays
2289 on an obstack, so there is little to be gained by trying to free them
2290 unless you want to do a lot more work.
2291
2292 Whether or not psymtabs are created depends on the objfile's symbol
2293 reader. The core of @value{GDBN} hides the details of partial symbols
2294 and partial symbol tables behind a set of function pointers known as
2295 the @dfn{quick symbol functions}. These are documented in
2296 @file{symfile.h}.
2297
2298 @section Types
2299
2300 @unnumberedsubsec Fundamental Types (e.g., @code{FT_VOID}, @code{FT_BOOLEAN}).
2301
2302 @cindex fundamental types
2303 These are the fundamental types that @value{GDBN} uses internally. Fundamental
2304 types from the various debugging formats (stabs, ELF, etc) are mapped
2305 into one of these. They are basically a union of all fundamental types
2306 that @value{GDBN} knows about for all the languages that @value{GDBN}
2307 knows about.
2308
2309 @unnumberedsubsec Type Codes (e.g., @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}, @code{TYPE_CODE_ARRAY}).
2310
2311 @cindex type codes
2312 Each time @value{GDBN} builds an internal type, it marks it with one
2313 of these types. The type may be a fundamental type, such as
2314 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT}, or a derived type, such as @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}
2315 which is a pointer to another type. Typically, several @code{FT_*}
2316 types map to one @code{TYPE_CODE_*} type, and are distinguished by
2317 other members of the type struct, such as whether the type is signed
2318 or unsigned, and how many bits it uses.
2319
2320 @unnumberedsubsec Builtin Types (e.g., @code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_char}).
2321
2322 These are instances of type structs that roughly correspond to
2323 fundamental types and are created as global types for @value{GDBN} to
2324 use for various ugly historical reasons. We eventually want to
2325 eliminate these. Note for example that @code{builtin_type_int}
2326 initialized in @file{gdbtypes.c} is basically the same as a
2327 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT} type that is initialized in @file{c-lang.c} for
2328 an @code{FT_INTEGER} fundamental type. The difference is that the
2329 @code{builtin_type} is not associated with any particular objfile, and
2330 only one instance exists, while @file{c-lang.c} builds as many
2331 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT} types as needed, with each one associated with
2332 some particular objfile.
2333
2334 @section Object File Formats
2335 @cindex object file formats
2336
2337 @subsection a.out
2338
2339 @cindex @code{a.out} format
2340 The @code{a.out} format is the original file format for Unix. It
2341 consists of three sections: @code{text}, @code{data}, and @code{bss},
2342 which are for program code, initialized data, and uninitialized data,
2343 respectively.
2344
2345 The @code{a.out} format is so simple that it doesn't have any reserved
2346 place for debugging information. (Hey, the original Unix hackers used
2347 @samp{adb}, which is a machine-language debugger!) The only debugging
2348 format for @code{a.out} is stabs, which is encoded as a set of normal
2349 symbols with distinctive attributes.
2350
2351 The basic @code{a.out} reader is in @file{dbxread.c}.
2352
2353 @subsection COFF
2354
2355 @cindex COFF format
2356 The COFF format was introduced with System V Release 3 (SVR3) Unix.
2357 COFF files may have multiple sections, each prefixed by a header. The
2358 number of sections is limited.
2359
2360 The COFF specification includes support for debugging. Although this
2361 was a step forward, the debugging information was woefully limited.
2362 For instance, it was not possible to represent code that came from an
2363 included file. GNU's COFF-using configs often use stabs-type info,
2364 encapsulated in special sections.
2365
2366 The COFF reader is in @file{coffread.c}.
2367
2368 @subsection ECOFF
2369
2370 @cindex ECOFF format
2371 ECOFF is an extended COFF originally introduced for Mips and Alpha
2372 workstations.
2373
2374 The basic ECOFF reader is in @file{mipsread.c}.
2375
2376 @subsection XCOFF
2377
2378 @cindex XCOFF format
2379 The IBM RS/6000 running AIX uses an object file format called XCOFF.
2380 The COFF sections, symbols, and line numbers are used, but debugging
2381 symbols are @code{dbx}-style stabs whose strings are located in the
2382 @code{.debug} section (rather than the string table). For more
2383 information, see @ref{Top,,,stabs,The Stabs Debugging Format}.
2384
2385 The shared library scheme has a clean interface for figuring out what
2386 shared libraries are in use, but the catch is that everything which
2387 refers to addresses (symbol tables and breakpoints at least) needs to be
2388 relocated for both shared libraries and the main executable. At least
2389 using the standard mechanism this can only be done once the program has
2390 been run (or the core file has been read).
2391
2392 @subsection PE
2393
2394 @cindex PE-COFF format
2395 Windows 95 and NT use the PE (@dfn{Portable Executable}) format for their
2396 executables. PE is basically COFF with additional headers.
2397
2398 While BFD includes special PE support, @value{GDBN} needs only the basic
2399 COFF reader.
2400
2401 @subsection ELF
2402
2403 @cindex ELF format
2404 The ELF format came with System V Release 4 (SVR4) Unix. ELF is
2405 similar to COFF in being organized into a number of sections, but it
2406 removes many of COFF's limitations. Debugging info may be either stabs
2407 encapsulated in ELF sections, or more commonly these days, DWARF.
2408
2409 The basic ELF reader is in @file{elfread.c}.
2410
2411 @subsection SOM
2412
2413 @cindex SOM format
2414 SOM is HP's object file and debug format (not to be confused with IBM's
2415 SOM, which is a cross-language ABI).
2416
2417 The SOM reader is in @file{somread.c}.
2418
2419 @section Debugging File Formats
2420
2421 This section describes characteristics of debugging information that
2422 are independent of the object file format.
2423
2424 @subsection stabs
2425
2426 @cindex stabs debugging info
2427 @code{stabs} started out as special symbols within the @code{a.out}
2428 format. Since then, it has been encapsulated into other file
2429 formats, such as COFF and ELF.
2430
2431 While @file{dbxread.c} does some of the basic stab processing,
2432 including for encapsulated versions, @file{stabsread.c} does
2433 the real work.
2434
2435 @subsection COFF
2436
2437 @cindex COFF debugging info
2438 The basic COFF definition includes debugging information. The level
2439 of support is minimal and non-extensible, and is not often used.
2440
2441 @subsection Mips debug (Third Eye)
2442
2443 @cindex ECOFF debugging info
2444 ECOFF includes a definition of a special debug format.
2445
2446 The file @file{mdebugread.c} implements reading for this format.
2447
2448 @c mention DWARF 1 as a formerly-supported format
2449
2450 @subsection DWARF 2
2451
2452 @cindex DWARF 2 debugging info
2453 DWARF 2 is an improved but incompatible version of DWARF 1.
2454
2455 The DWARF 2 reader is in @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2456
2457 @subsection Compressed DWARF 2
2458
2459 @cindex Compressed DWARF 2 debugging info
2460 Compressed DWARF 2 is not technically a separate debugging format, but
2461 merely DWARF 2 debug information that has been compressed. In this
2462 format, every object-file section holding DWARF 2 debugging
2463 information is compressed and prepended with a header. (The section
2464 is also typically renamed, so a section called @code{.debug_info} in a
2465 DWARF 2 binary would be called @code{.zdebug_info} in a compressed
2466 DWARF 2 binary.) The header is 12 bytes long:
2467
2468 @itemize @bullet
2469 @item
2470 4 bytes: the literal string ``ZLIB''
2471 @item
2472 8 bytes: the uncompressed size of the section, in big-endian byte
2473 order.
2474 @end itemize
2475
2476 The same reader is used for both compressed an normal DWARF 2 info.
2477 Section decompression is done in @code{zlib_decompress_section} in
2478 @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2479
2480 @subsection DWARF 3
2481
2482 @cindex DWARF 3 debugging info
2483 DWARF 3 is an improved version of DWARF 2.
2484
2485 @subsection SOM
2486
2487 @cindex SOM debugging info
2488 Like COFF, the SOM definition includes debugging information.
2489
2490 @section Adding a New Symbol Reader to @value{GDBN}
2491
2492 @cindex adding debugging info reader
2493 If you are using an existing object file format (@code{a.out}, COFF, ELF, etc),
2494 there is probably little to be done.
2495
2496 If you need to add a new object file format, you must first add it to
2497 BFD. This is beyond the scope of this document.
2498
2499 You must then arrange for the BFD code to provide access to the
2500 debugging symbols. Generally @value{GDBN} will have to call swapping
2501 routines from BFD and a few other BFD internal routines to locate the
2502 debugging information. As much as possible, @value{GDBN} should not
2503 depend on the BFD internal data structures.
2504
2505 For some targets (e.g., COFF), there is a special transfer vector used
2506 to call swapping routines, since the external data structures on various
2507 platforms have different sizes and layouts. Specialized routines that
2508 will only ever be implemented by one object file format may be called
2509 directly. This interface should be described in a file
2510 @file{bfd/lib@var{xyz}.h}, which is included by @value{GDBN}.
2511
2512 @section Memory Management for Symbol Files
2513
2514 Most memory associated with a loaded symbol file is stored on
2515 its @code{objfile_obstack}. This includes symbols, types,
2516 namespace data, and other information produced by the symbol readers.
2517
2518 Because this data lives on the objfile's obstack, it is automatically
2519 released when the objfile is unloaded or reloaded. Therefore one
2520 objfile must not reference symbol or type data from another objfile;
2521 they could be unloaded at different times.
2522
2523 User convenience variables, et cetera, have associated types. Normally
2524 these types live in the associated objfile. However, when the objfile
2525 is unloaded, those types are deep copied to global memory, so that
2526 the values of the user variables and history items are not lost.
2527
2528
2529 @node Language Support
2530
2531 @chapter Language Support
2532
2533 @cindex language support
2534 @value{GDBN}'s language support is mainly driven by the symbol reader,
2535 although it is possible for the user to set the source language
2536 manually.
2537
2538 @value{GDBN} chooses the source language by looking at the extension
2539 of the file recorded in the debug info; @file{.c} means C, @file{.f}
2540 means Fortran, etc. It may also use a special-purpose language
2541 identifier if the debug format supports it, like with DWARF.
2542
2543 @section Adding a Source Language to @value{GDBN}
2544
2545 @cindex adding source language
2546 To add other languages to @value{GDBN}'s expression parser, follow the
2547 following steps:
2548
2549 @table @emph
2550 @item Create the expression parser.
2551
2552 @cindex expression parser
2553 This should reside in a file @file{@var{lang}-exp.y}. Routines for
2554 building parsed expressions into a @code{union exp_element} list are in
2555 @file{parse.c}.
2556
2557 @cindex language parser
2558 Since we can't depend upon everyone having Bison, and YACC produces
2559 parsers that define a bunch of global names, the following lines
2560 @strong{must} be included at the top of the YACC parser, to prevent the
2561 various parsers from defining the same global names:
2562
2563 @smallexample
2564 #define yyparse @var{lang}_parse
2565 #define yylex @var{lang}_lex
2566 #define yyerror @var{lang}_error
2567 #define yylval @var{lang}_lval
2568 #define yychar @var{lang}_char
2569 #define yydebug @var{lang}_debug
2570 #define yypact @var{lang}_pact
2571 #define yyr1 @var{lang}_r1
2572 #define yyr2 @var{lang}_r2
2573 #define yydef @var{lang}_def
2574 #define yychk @var{lang}_chk
2575 #define yypgo @var{lang}_pgo
2576 #define yyact @var{lang}_act
2577 #define yyexca @var{lang}_exca
2578 #define yyerrflag @var{lang}_errflag
2579 #define yynerrs @var{lang}_nerrs
2580 @end smallexample
2581
2582 At the bottom of your parser, define a @code{struct language_defn} and
2583 initialize it with the right values for your language. Define an
2584 @code{initialize_@var{lang}} routine and have it call
2585 @samp{add_language(@var{lang}_language_defn)} to tell the rest of @value{GDBN}
2586 that your language exists. You'll need some other supporting variables
2587 and functions, which will be used via pointers from your
2588 @code{@var{lang}_language_defn}. See the declaration of @code{struct
2589 language_defn} in @file{language.h}, and the other @file{*-exp.y} files,
2590 for more information.
2591
2592 @item Add any evaluation routines, if necessary
2593
2594 @cindex expression evaluation routines
2595 @findex evaluate_subexp
2596 @findex prefixify_subexp
2597 @findex length_of_subexp
2598 If you need new opcodes (that represent the operations of the language),
2599 add them to the enumerated type in @file{expression.h}. Add support
2600 code for these operations in the @code{evaluate_subexp} function
2601 defined in the file @file{eval.c}. Add cases
2602 for new opcodes in two functions from @file{parse.c}:
2603 @code{prefixify_subexp} and @code{length_of_subexp}. These compute
2604 the number of @code{exp_element}s that a given operation takes up.
2605
2606 @item Update some existing code
2607
2608 Add an enumerated identifier for your language to the enumerated type
2609 @code{enum language} in @file{defs.h}.
2610
2611 Update the routines in @file{language.c} so your language is included.
2612 These routines include type predicates and such, which (in some cases)
2613 are language dependent. If your language does not appear in the switch
2614 statement, an error is reported.
2615
2616 @vindex current_language
2617 Also included in @file{language.c} is the code that updates the variable
2618 @code{current_language}, and the routines that translate the
2619 @code{language_@var{lang}} enumerated identifier into a printable
2620 string.
2621
2622 @findex _initialize_language
2623 Update the function @code{_initialize_language} to include your
2624 language. This function picks the default language upon startup, so is
2625 dependent upon which languages that @value{GDBN} is built for.
2626
2627 @findex allocate_symtab
2628 Update @code{allocate_symtab} in @file{symfile.c} and/or symbol-reading
2629 code so that the language of each symtab (source file) is set properly.
2630 This is used to determine the language to use at each stack frame level.
2631 Currently, the language is set based upon the extension of the source
2632 file. If the language can be better inferred from the symbol
2633 information, please set the language of the symtab in the symbol-reading
2634 code.
2635
2636 @findex print_subexp
2637 @findex op_print_tab
2638 Add helper code to @code{print_subexp} (in @file{expprint.c}) to handle any new
2639 expression opcodes you have added to @file{expression.h}. Also, add the
2640 printed representations of your operators to @code{op_print_tab}.
2641
2642 @item Add a place of call
2643
2644 @findex parse_exp_1
2645 Add a call to @code{@var{lang}_parse()} and @code{@var{lang}_error} in
2646 @code{parse_exp_1} (defined in @file{parse.c}).
2647
2648 @item Edit @file{Makefile.in}
2649
2650 Add dependencies in @file{Makefile.in}. Make sure you update the macro
2651 variables such as @code{HFILES} and @code{OBJS}, otherwise your code may
2652 not get linked in, or, worse yet, it may not get @code{tar}red into the
2653 distribution!
2654 @end table
2655
2656
2657 @node Host Definition
2658
2659 @chapter Host Definition
2660
2661 With the advent of Autoconf, it's rarely necessary to have host
2662 definition machinery anymore. The following information is provided,
2663 mainly, as an historical reference.
2664
2665 @section Adding a New Host
2666
2667 @cindex adding a new host
2668 @cindex host, adding
2669 @value{GDBN}'s host configuration support normally happens via Autoconf.
2670 New host-specific definitions should not be needed. Older hosts
2671 @value{GDBN} still use the host-specific definitions and files listed
2672 below, but these mostly exist for historical reasons, and will
2673 eventually disappear.
2674
2675 @table @file
2676 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
2677 This file is a Makefile fragment that once contained both host and
2678 native configuration information (@pxref{Native Debugging}) for the
2679 machine @var{xyz}. The host configuration information is now handled
2680 by Autoconf.
2681
2682 Host configuration information included definitions for @code{CC},
2683 @code{SYSV_DEFINE}, @code{XM_CFLAGS}, @code{XM_ADD_FILES},
2684 @code{XM_CLIBS}, @code{XM_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
2685
2686 New host-only configurations do not need this file.
2687
2688 @end table
2689
2690 (Files named @file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/xm-@var{xyz}.h} were once
2691 used to define host-specific macros, but were no longer needed and
2692 have all been removed.)
2693
2694 @subheading Generic Host Support Files
2695
2696 @cindex generic host support
2697 There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
2698 various systems.
2699
2700 @table @file
2701 @cindex remote debugging support
2702 @cindex serial line support
2703 @item ser-unix.c
2704 This contains serial line support for Unix systems. It is included by
2705 default on all Unix-like hosts.
2706
2707 @item ser-pipe.c
2708 This contains serial pipe support for Unix systems. It is included by
2709 default on all Unix-like hosts.
2710
2711 @item ser-mingw.c
2712 This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under
2713 Windows using MinGW.
2714
2715 @item ser-go32.c
2716 This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under DOS,
2717 using the DJGPP (a.k.a.@: GO32) execution environment.
2718
2719 @cindex TCP remote support
2720 @item ser-tcp.c
2721 This contains generic TCP support using sockets. It is included by
2722 default on all Unix-like hosts and with MinGW.
2723 @end table
2724
2725 @section Host Conditionals
2726
2727 When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
2728 defined or left undefined, to control compilation based on the
2729 attributes of the host system. While formerly they could be set in
2730 host-specific header files, at present they can be changed only by
2731 setting @code{CFLAGS} when building, or by editing the source code.
2732
2733 These macros and their meanings (or if the meaning is not documented
2734 here, then one of the source files where they are used is indicated)
2735 are:
2736
2737 @ftable @code
2738 @item @value{GDBN}INIT_FILENAME
2739 The default name of @value{GDBN}'s initialization file (normally
2740 @file{.gdbinit}).
2741
2742 @item SIGWINCH_HANDLER
2743 If your host defines @code{SIGWINCH}, you can define this to be the name
2744 of a function to be called if @code{SIGWINCH} is received.
2745
2746 @item SIGWINCH_HANDLER_BODY
2747 Define this to expand into code that will define the function named by
2748 the expansion of @code{SIGWINCH_HANDLER}.
2749
2750 @item CRLF_SOURCE_FILES
2751 @cindex DOS text files
2752 Define this if host files use @code{\r\n} rather than @code{\n} as a
2753 line terminator. This will cause source file listings to omit @code{\r}
2754 characters when printing and it will allow @code{\r\n} line endings of files
2755 which are ``sourced'' by gdb. It must be possible to open files in binary
2756 mode using @code{O_BINARY} or, for fopen, @code{"rb"}.
2757
2758 @item DEFAULT_PROMPT
2759 @cindex prompt
2760 The default value of the prompt string (normally @code{"(gdb) "}).
2761
2762 @item DEV_TTY
2763 @cindex terminal device
2764 The name of the generic TTY device, defaults to @code{"/dev/tty"}.
2765
2766 @item ISATTY
2767 Substitute for isatty, if not available.
2768
2769 @item FOPEN_RB
2770 Define this if binary files are opened the same way as text files.
2771
2772 @item CC_HAS_LONG_LONG
2773 @cindex @code{long long} data type
2774 Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long long}. This is set
2775 by the @code{configure} script.
2776
2777 @item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_LONG
2778 Define this if the host can handle printing of long long integers via
2779 the printf format conversion specifier @code{ll}. This is set by the
2780 @code{configure} script.
2781
2782 @item LSEEK_NOT_LINEAR
2783 Define this if @code{lseek (n)} does not necessarily move to byte number
2784 @code{n} in the file. This is only used when reading source files. It
2785 is normally faster to define @code{CRLF_SOURCE_FILES} when possible.
2786
2787 @item lint
2788 Define this to help placate @code{lint} in some situations.
2789
2790 @item volatile
2791 Define this to override the defaults of @code{__volatile__} or
2792 @code{/**/}.
2793 @end ftable
2794
2795
2796 @node Target Architecture Definition
2797
2798 @chapter Target Architecture Definition
2799
2800 @cindex target architecture definition
2801 @value{GDBN}'s target architecture defines what sort of
2802 machine-language programs @value{GDBN} can work with, and how it works
2803 with them.
2804
2805 The target architecture object is implemented as the C structure
2806 @code{struct gdbarch *}. The structure, and its methods, are generated
2807 using the Bourne shell script @file{gdbarch.sh}.
2808
2809 @menu
2810 * OS ABI Variant Handling::
2811 * Initialize New Architecture::
2812 * Registers and Memory::
2813 * Pointers and Addresses::
2814 * Address Classes::
2815 * Register Representation::
2816 * Frame Interpretation::
2817 * Inferior Call Setup::
2818 * Adding support for debugging core files::
2819 * Defining Other Architecture Features::
2820 * Adding a New Target::
2821 @end menu
2822
2823 @node OS ABI Variant Handling
2824 @section Operating System ABI Variant Handling
2825 @cindex OS ABI variants
2826
2827 @value{GDBN} provides a mechanism for handling variations in OS
2828 ABIs. An OS ABI variant may have influence over any number of
2829 variables in the target architecture definition. There are two major
2830 components in the OS ABI mechanism: sniffers and handlers.
2831
2832 A @dfn{sniffer} examines a file matching a BFD architecture/flavour pair
2833 (the architecture may be wildcarded) in an attempt to determine the
2834 OS ABI of that file. Sniffers with a wildcarded architecture are considered
2835 to be @dfn{generic}, while sniffers for a specific architecture are
2836 considered to be @dfn{specific}. A match from a specific sniffer
2837 overrides a match from a generic sniffer. Multiple sniffers for an
2838 architecture/flavour may exist, in order to differentiate between two
2839 different operating systems which use the same basic file format. The
2840 OS ABI framework provides a generic sniffer for ELF-format files which
2841 examines the @code{EI_OSABI} field of the ELF header, as well as note
2842 sections known to be used by several operating systems.
2843
2844 @cindex fine-tuning @code{gdbarch} structure
2845 A @dfn{handler} is used to fine-tune the @code{gdbarch} structure for the
2846 selected OS ABI. There may be only one handler for a given OS ABI
2847 for each BFD architecture.
2848
2849 The following OS ABI variants are defined in @file{defs.h}:
2850
2851 @table @code
2852
2853 @findex GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2854 @item GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2855 Used for struct gdbarch_info if ABI is still uninitialized.
2856
2857 @findex GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2858 @item GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2859 The ABI of the inferior is unknown. The default @code{gdbarch}
2860 settings for the architecture will be used.
2861
2862 @findex GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2863 @item GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2864 UNIX System V Release 4.
2865
2866 @findex GDB_OSABI_HURD
2867 @item GDB_OSABI_HURD
2868 GNU using the Hurd kernel.
2869
2870 @findex GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2871 @item GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2872 Sun Solaris.
2873
2874 @findex GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2875 @item GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2876 OSF/1, including Digital UNIX and Compaq Tru64 UNIX.
2877
2878 @findex GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2879 @item GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2880 GNU using the Linux kernel.
2881
2882 @findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2883 @item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2884 FreeBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2885
2886 @findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2887 @item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2888 FreeBSD using the ELF executable format.
2889
2890 @findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2891 @item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2892 NetBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2893
2894 @findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2895 @item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2896 NetBSD using the ELF executable format.
2897
2898 @findex GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2899 @item GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2900 OpenBSD using the ELF executable format.
2901
2902 @findex GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2903 @item GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2904 Windows CE.
2905
2906 @findex GDB_OSABI_GO32
2907 @item GDB_OSABI_GO32
2908 DJGPP.
2909
2910 @findex GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2911 @item GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2912 Irix.
2913
2914 @findex GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2915 @item GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2916 Interix (Posix layer for MS-Windows systems).
2917
2918 @findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2919 @item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2920 HP/UX using the ELF executable format.
2921
2922 @findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2923 @item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2924 HP/UX using the SOM executable format.
2925
2926 @findex GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2927 @item GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2928 QNX Neutrino.
2929
2930 @findex GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2931 @item GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2932 Cygwin.
2933
2934 @findex GDB_OSABI_AIX
2935 @item GDB_OSABI_AIX
2936 AIX.
2937
2938 @end table
2939
2940 Here are the functions that make up the OS ABI framework:
2941
2942 @deftypefun {const char *} gdbarch_osabi_name (enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2943 Return the name of the OS ABI corresponding to @var{osabi}.
2944 @end deftypefun
2945
2946 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, unsigned long @var{machine}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi}, void (*@var{init_osabi})(struct gdbarch_info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}))
2947 Register the OS ABI handler specified by @var{init_osabi} for the
2948 architecture, machine type and OS ABI specified by @var{arch},
2949 @var{machine} and @var{osabi}. In most cases, a value of zero for the
2950 machine type, which implies the architecture's default machine type,
2951 will suffice.
2952 @end deftypefun
2953
2954 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi_sniffer (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, enum bfd_flavour @var{flavour}, enum gdb_osabi (*@var{sniffer})(bfd *@var{abfd}))
2955 Register the OS ABI file sniffer specified by @var{sniffer} for the
2956 BFD architecture/flavour pair specified by @var{arch} and @var{flavour}.
2957 If @var{arch} is @code{bfd_arch_unknown}, the sniffer is considered to
2958 be generic, and is allowed to examine @var{flavour}-flavoured files for
2959 any architecture.
2960 @end deftypefun
2961
2962 @deftypefun {enum gdb_osabi} gdbarch_lookup_osabi (bfd *@var{abfd})
2963 Examine the file described by @var{abfd} to determine its OS ABI.
2964 The value @code{GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN} is returned if the OS ABI cannot
2965 be determined.
2966 @end deftypefun
2967
2968 @deftypefun void gdbarch_init_osabi (struct gdbarch info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2969 Invoke the OS ABI handler corresponding to @var{osabi} to fine-tune the
2970 @code{gdbarch} structure specified by @var{gdbarch}. If a handler
2971 corresponding to @var{osabi} has not been registered for @var{gdbarch}'s
2972 architecture, a warning will be issued and the debugging session will continue
2973 with the defaults already established for @var{gdbarch}.
2974 @end deftypefun
2975
2976 @deftypefun void generic_elf_osabi_sniff_abi_tag_sections (bfd *@var{abfd}, asection *@var{sect}, void *@var{obj})
2977 Helper routine for ELF file sniffers. Examine the file described by
2978 @var{abfd} and look at ABI tag note sections to determine the OS ABI
2979 from the note. This function should be called via
2980 @code{bfd_map_over_sections}.
2981 @end deftypefun
2982
2983 @node Initialize New Architecture
2984 @section Initializing a New Architecture
2985
2986 @menu
2987 * How an Architecture is Represented::
2988 * Looking Up an Existing Architecture::
2989 * Creating a New Architecture::
2990 @end menu
2991
2992 @node How an Architecture is Represented
2993 @subsection How an Architecture is Represented
2994 @cindex architecture representation
2995 @cindex representation of architecture
2996
2997 Each @code{gdbarch} is associated with a single @sc{bfd} architecture,
2998 via a @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}} in the @code{bfd_architecture}
2999 enumeration. The @code{gdbarch} is registered by a call to
3000 @code{register_gdbarch_init}, usually from the file's
3001 @code{_initialize_@var{filename}} routine, which will be automatically
3002 called during @value{GDBN} startup. The arguments are a @sc{bfd}
3003 architecture constant and an initialization function.
3004
3005 @findex _initialize_@var{arch}_tdep
3006 @cindex @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}
3007 A @value{GDBN} description for a new architecture, @var{arch} is created by
3008 defining a global function @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep}, by
3009 convention in the source file @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}. For example,
3010 in the case of the OpenRISC 1000, this function is called
3011 @code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} and is found in the file
3012 @file{or1k-tdep.c}.
3013
3014 @cindex @file{configure.tgt}
3015 @cindex @code{gdbarch}
3016 @findex gdbarch_register
3017 The resulting object files containing the implementation of the
3018 @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function are specified in the @value{GDBN}
3019 @file{configure.tgt} file, which includes a large case statement
3020 pattern matching against the @code{--target} option of the
3021 @code{configure} script. The new @code{struct gdbarch} is created
3022 within the @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function by calling
3023 @code{gdbarch_register}:
3024
3025 @smallexample
3026 void gdbarch_register (enum bfd_architecture @var{architecture},
3027 gdbarch_init_ftype *@var{init_func},
3028 gdbarch_dump_tdep_ftype *@var{tdep_dump_func});
3029 @end smallexample
3030
3031 The @var{architecture} will identify the unique @sc{bfd} to be
3032 associated with this @code{gdbarch}. The @var{init_func} funciton is
3033 called to create and return the new @code{struct gdbarch}. The
3034 @var{tdep_dump_func} function will dump the target specific details
3035 associated with this architecture.
3036
3037 For example the function @code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} creates its
3038 architecture for 32-bit OpenRISC 1000 architectures by calling:
3039
3040 @smallexample
3041 gdbarch_register (bfd_arch_or32, or1k_gdbarch_init, or1k_dump_tdep);
3042 @end smallexample
3043
3044 @node Looking Up an Existing Architecture
3045 @subsection Looking Up an Existing Architecture
3046 @cindex @code{gdbarch} lookup
3047
3048 The initialization function has this prototype:
3049
3050 @smallexample
3051 static struct gdbarch *
3052 @var{arch}_gdbarch_init (struct gdbarch_info @var{info},
3053 struct gdbarch_list *@var{arches})
3054 @end smallexample
3055
3056 The @var{info} argument contains parameters used to select the correct
3057 architecture, and @var{arches} is a list of architectures which
3058 have already been created with the same @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}}
3059 value.
3060
3061 The initialization function should first make sure that @var{info}
3062 is acceptable, and return @code{NULL} if it is not. Then, it should
3063 search through @var{arches} for an exact match to @var{info}, and
3064 return one if found. Lastly, if no exact match was found, it should
3065 create a new architecture based on @var{info} and return it.
3066
3067 @findex gdbarch_list_lookup_by_info
3068 @cindex @code{gdbarch_info}
3069 The lookup is done using @code{gdbarch_list_lookup_by_info}. It is
3070 passed the list of existing architectures, @var{arches}, and the
3071 @code{struct gdbarch_info}, @var{info}, and returns the first matching
3072 architecture it finds, or @code{NULL} if none are found. If an
3073 architecture is found it can be returned as the result from the
3074 initialization function, otherwise a new @code{struct gdbach} will need
3075 to be created.
3076
3077 The struct gdbarch_info has the following components:
3078
3079 @smallexample
3080 struct gdbarch_info
3081 @{
3082 const struct bfd_arch_info *bfd_arch_info;
3083 int byte_order;
3084 bfd *abfd;
3085 struct gdbarch_tdep_info *tdep_info;
3086 enum gdb_osabi osabi;
3087 const struct target_desc *target_desc;
3088 @};
3089 @end smallexample
3090
3091 @vindex bfd_arch_info
3092 The @code{bfd_arch_info} member holds the key details about the
3093 architecture. The @code{byte_order} member is a value in an
3094 enumeration indicating the endianism. The @code{abfd} member is a
3095 pointer to the full @sc{bfd}, the @code{tdep_info} member is
3096 additional custom target specific information, @code{osabi} identifies
3097 which (if any) of a number of operating specific ABIs are used by this
3098 architecture and the @code{target_desc} member is a set of name-value
3099 pairs with information about register usage in this target.
3100
3101 When the @code{struct gdbarch} initialization function is called, not
3102 all the fields are provided---only those which can be deduced from the
3103 @sc{bfd}. The @code{struct gdbarch_info}, @var{info} is used as a
3104 look-up key with the list of existing architectures, @var{arches} to
3105 see if a suitable architecture already exists. The @var{tdep_info},
3106 @var{osabi} and @var{target_desc} fields may be added before this
3107 lookup to refine the search.
3108
3109 Only information in @var{info} should be used to choose the new
3110 architecture. Historically, @var{info} could be sparse, and
3111 defaults would be collected from the first element on @var{arches}.
3112 However, @value{GDBN} now fills in @var{info} more thoroughly,
3113 so new @code{gdbarch} initialization functions should not take
3114 defaults from @var{arches}.
3115
3116 @node Creating a New Architecture
3117 @subsection Creating a New Architecture
3118 @cindex @code{struct gdbarch} creation
3119
3120 @findex gdbarch_alloc
3121 @cindex @code{gdbarch_tdep} when allocating new @code{gdbarch}
3122 If no architecture is found, then a new architecture must be created,
3123 by calling @code{gdbarch_alloc} using the supplied @code{@w{struct
3124 gdbarch_info}} and any additional custom target specific
3125 information in a @code{struct gdbarch_tdep}. The prototype for
3126 @code{gdbarch_alloc} is:
3127
3128 @smallexample
3129 struct gdbarch *gdbarch_alloc (const struct gdbarch_info *@var{info},
3130 struct gdbarch_tdep *@var{tdep});
3131 @end smallexample
3132
3133 @cindex @code{set_gdbarch} functions
3134 @cindex @code{gdbarch} accessor functions
3135 The newly created struct gdbarch must then be populated. Although
3136 there are default values, in most cases they are not what is
3137 required.
3138
3139 For each element, @var{X}, there is are a pair of corresponding accessor
3140 functions, one to set the value of that element,
3141 @code{set_gdbarch_@var{X}}, the second to either get the value of an
3142 element (if it is a variable) or to apply the element (if it is a
3143 function), @code{gdbarch_@var{X}}. Note that both accessor functions
3144 take a pointer to the @code{@w{struct gdbarch}} as first
3145 argument. Populating the new @code{gdbarch} should use the
3146 @code{set_gdbarch} functions.
3147
3148 The following sections identify the main elements that should be set
3149 in this way. This is not the complete list, but represents the
3150 functions and elements that must commonly be specified for a new
3151 architecture. Many of the functions and variables are described in the
3152 header file @file{gdbarch.h}.
3153
3154 This is the main work in defining a new architecture. Implementing the
3155 set of functions to populate the @code{struct gdbarch}.
3156
3157 @cindex @code{gdbarch_tdep} definition
3158 @code{struct gdbarch_tdep} is not defined within @value{GDBN}---it is up
3159 to the user to define this struct if it is needed to hold custom target
3160 information that is not covered by the standard @code{@w{struct
3161 gdbarch}}. For example with the OpenRISC 1000 architecture it is used to
3162 hold the number of matchpoints available in the target (along with other
3163 information).
3164
3165 If there is no additional target specific information, it can be set to
3166 @code{NULL}.
3167
3168 @node Registers and Memory
3169 @section Registers and Memory
3170
3171 @value{GDBN}'s model of the target machine is rather simple.
3172 @value{GDBN} assumes the machine includes a bank of registers and a
3173 block of memory. Each register may have a different size.
3174
3175 @value{GDBN} does not have a magical way to match up with the
3176 compiler's idea of which registers are which; however, it is critical
3177 that they do match up accurately. The only way to make this work is
3178 to get accurate information about the order that the compiler uses,
3179 and to reflect that in the @code{gdbarch_register_name} and related functions.
3180
3181 @value{GDBN} can handle big-endian, little-endian, and bi-endian architectures.
3182
3183 @node Pointers and Addresses
3184 @section Pointers Are Not Always Addresses
3185 @cindex pointer representation
3186 @cindex address representation
3187 @cindex word-addressed machines
3188 @cindex separate data and code address spaces
3189 @cindex spaces, separate data and code address
3190 @cindex address spaces, separate data and code
3191 @cindex code pointers, word-addressed
3192 @cindex converting between pointers and addresses
3193 @cindex D10V addresses
3194
3195 On almost all 32-bit architectures, the representation of a pointer is
3196 indistinguishable from the representation of some fixed-length number
3197 whose value is the byte address of the object pointed to. On such
3198 machines, the words ``pointer'' and ``address'' can be used interchangeably.
3199 However, architectures with smaller word sizes are often cramped for
3200 address space, so they may choose a pointer representation that breaks this
3201 identity, and allows a larger code address space.
3202
3203 @c D10V is gone from sources - more current example?
3204
3205 For example, the Renesas D10V is a 16-bit VLIW processor whose
3206 instructions are 32 bits long@footnote{Some D10V instructions are
3207 actually pairs of 16-bit sub-instructions. However, since you can't
3208 jump into the middle of such a pair, code addresses can only refer to
3209 full 32 bit instructions, which is what matters in this explanation.}.
3210 If the D10V used ordinary byte addresses to refer to code locations,
3211 then the processor would only be able to address 64kb of instructions.
3212 However, since instructions must be aligned on four-byte boundaries, the
3213 low two bits of any valid instruction's byte address are always
3214 zero---byte addresses waste two bits. So instead of byte addresses,
3215 the D10V uses word addresses---byte addresses shifted right two bits---to
3216 refer to code. Thus, the D10V can use 16-bit words to address 256kb of
3217 code space.
3218
3219 However, this means that code pointers and data pointers have different
3220 forms on the D10V. The 16-bit word @code{0xC020} refers to byte address
3221 @code{0xC020} when used as a data address, but refers to byte address
3222 @code{0x30080} when used as a code address.
3223
3224 (The D10V also uses separate code and data address spaces, which also
3225 affects the correspondence between pointers and addresses, but we're
3226 going to ignore that here; this example is already too long.)
3227
3228 To cope with architectures like this---the D10V is not the only
3229 one!---@value{GDBN} tries to distinguish between @dfn{addresses}, which are
3230 byte numbers, and @dfn{pointers}, which are the target's representation
3231 of an address of a particular type of data. In the example above,
3232 @code{0xC020} is the pointer, which refers to one of the addresses
3233 @code{0xC020} or @code{0x30080}, depending on the type imposed upon it.
3234 @value{GDBN} provides functions for turning a pointer into an address
3235 and vice versa, in the appropriate way for the current architecture.
3236
3237 Unfortunately, since addresses and pointers are identical on almost all
3238 processors, this distinction tends to bit-rot pretty quickly. Thus,
3239 each time you port @value{GDBN} to an architecture which does
3240 distinguish between pointers and addresses, you'll probably need to
3241 clean up some architecture-independent code.
3242
3243 Here are functions which convert between pointers and addresses:
3244
3245 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR extract_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type})
3246 Treat the bytes at @var{buf} as a pointer or reference of type
3247 @var{type}, and return the address it represents, in a manner
3248 appropriate for the current architecture. This yields an address
3249 @value{GDBN} can use to read target memory, disassemble, etc. Note that
3250 @var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
3251 inferior's.
3252
3253 For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
3254 extracts a little-endian integer of the appropriate length from
3255 @var{buf} and returns it. However, if the current architecture is the
3256 D10V, this function will return a 16-bit integer extracted from
3257 @var{buf}, multiplied by four if @var{type} is a pointer to a function.
3258
3259 If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
3260 will signal an internal error.
3261 @end deftypefun
3262
3263 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR store_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3264 Store the address @var{addr} in @var{buf}, in the proper format for a
3265 pointer of type @var{type} in the current architecture. Note that
3266 @var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
3267 inferior's.
3268
3269 For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
3270 stores @var{addr} unmodified as a little-endian integer of the
3271 appropriate length in @var{buf}. However, if the current architecture
3272 is the D10V, this function divides @var{addr} by four if @var{type} is
3273 a pointer to a function, and then stores it in @var{buf}.
3274
3275 If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
3276 will signal an internal error.
3277 @end deftypefun
3278
3279 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_as_address (struct value *@var{val})
3280 Assuming that @var{val} is a pointer, return the address it represents,
3281 as appropriate for the current architecture.
3282
3283 This function actually works on integral values, as well as pointers.
3284 For pointers, it performs architecture-specific conversions as
3285 described above for @code{extract_typed_address}.
3286 @end deftypefun
3287
3288 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_from_pointer (struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3289 Create and return a value representing a pointer of type @var{type} to
3290 the address @var{addr}, as appropriate for the current architecture.
3291 This function performs architecture-specific conversions as described
3292 above for @code{store_typed_address}.
3293 @end deftypefun
3294
3295 Here are two functions which architectures can define to indicate the
3296 relationship between pointers and addresses. These have default
3297 definitions, appropriate for architectures on which all pointers are
3298 simple unsigned byte addresses.
3299
3300 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
3301 Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
3302 appropriate format for the current architecture. Return the byte
3303 address the pointer refers to.
3304
3305 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3306 C@t{++} reference type.
3307 @end deftypefun
3308
3309 @deftypefun void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3310 Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
3311 @var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
3312
3313 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3314 C@t{++} reference type.
3315 @end deftypefun
3316
3317 @node Address Classes
3318 @section Address Classes
3319 @cindex address classes
3320 @cindex DW_AT_byte_size
3321 @cindex DW_AT_address_class
3322
3323 Sometimes information about different kinds of addresses is available
3324 via the debug information. For example, some programming environments
3325 define addresses of several different sizes. If the debug information
3326 distinguishes these kinds of address classes through either the size
3327 info (e.g, @code{DW_AT_byte_size} in @w{DWARF 2}) or through an explicit
3328 address class attribute (e.g, @code{DW_AT_address_class} in @w{DWARF 2}), the
3329 following macros should be defined in order to disambiguate these
3330 types within @value{GDBN} as well as provide the added information to
3331 a @value{GDBN} user when printing type expressions.
3332
3333 @deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{byte_size}, int @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3334 Returns the type flags needed to construct a pointer type whose size
3335 is @var{byte_size} and whose address class is @var{dwarf2_addr_class}.
3336 This function is normally called from within a symbol reader. See
3337 @file{dwarf2read.c}.
3338 @end deftypefun
3339
3340 @deftypefun {char *} gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{type_flags})
3341 Given the type flags representing an address class qualifier, return
3342 its name.
3343 @end deftypefun
3344 @deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{name}, int *@var{type_flags_ptr})
3345 Given an address qualifier name, set the @code{int} referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the type flags
3346 for that address class qualifier.
3347 @end deftypefun
3348
3349 Since the need for address classes is rather rare, none of
3350 the address class functions are defined by default. Predicate
3351 functions are provided to detect when they are defined.
3352
3353 Consider a hypothetical architecture in which addresses are normally
3354 32-bits wide, but 16-bit addresses are also supported. Furthermore,
3355 suppose that the @w{DWARF 2} information for this architecture simply
3356 uses a @code{DW_AT_byte_size} value of 2 to indicate the use of one
3357 of these "short" pointers. The following functions could be defined
3358 to implement the address class functions:
3359
3360 @smallexample
3361 somearch_address_class_type_flags (int byte_size,
3362 int dwarf2_addr_class)
3363 @{
3364 if (byte_size == 2)
3365 return TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3366 else
3367 return 0;
3368 @}
3369
3370 static char *
3371 somearch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (int type_flags)
3372 @{
3373 if (type_flags & TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1)
3374 return "short";
3375 else
3376 return NULL;
3377 @}
3378
3379 int
3380 somearch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (char *name,
3381 int *type_flags_ptr)
3382 @{
3383 if (strcmp (name, "short") == 0)
3384 @{
3385 *type_flags_ptr = TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3386 return 1;
3387 @}
3388 else
3389 return 0;
3390 @}
3391 @end smallexample
3392
3393 The qualifier @code{@@short} is used in @value{GDBN}'s type expressions
3394 to indicate the presence of one of these ``short'' pointers. For
3395 example if the debug information indicates that @code{short_ptr_var} is
3396 one of these short pointers, @value{GDBN} might show the following
3397 behavior:
3398
3399 @smallexample
3400 (gdb) ptype short_ptr_var
3401 type = int * @@short
3402 @end smallexample
3403
3404
3405 @node Register Representation
3406 @section Register Representation
3407
3408 @menu
3409 * Raw and Cooked Registers::
3410 * Register Architecture Functions & Variables::
3411 * Register Information Functions::
3412 * Register and Memory Data::
3413 * Register Caching::
3414 @end menu
3415
3416 @node Raw and Cooked Registers
3417 @subsection Raw and Cooked Registers
3418 @cindex raw register representation
3419 @cindex cooked register representation
3420 @cindex representations, raw and cooked registers
3421
3422 @value{GDBN} considers registers to be a set with members numbered
3423 linearly from 0 upwards. The first part of that set corresponds to real
3424 physical registers, the second part to any @dfn{pseudo-registers}.
3425 Pseudo-registers have no independent physical existence, but are useful
3426 representations of information within the architecture. For example the
3427 OpenRISC 1000 architecture has up to 32 general purpose registers, which
3428 are typically represented as 32-bit (or 64-bit) integers. However the
3429 GPRs are also used as operands to the floating point operations, and it
3430 could be convenient to define a set of pseudo-registers, to show the
3431 GPRs represented as floating point values.
3432
3433 For any architecture, the implementer will decide on a mapping from
3434 hardware to @value{GDBN} register numbers. The registers corresponding to real
3435 hardware are referred to as @dfn{raw} registers, the remaining registers are
3436 @dfn{pseudo-registers}. The total register set (raw and pseudo) is called
3437 the @dfn{cooked} register set.
3438
3439
3440 @node Register Architecture Functions & Variables
3441 @subsection Functions and Variables Specifying the Register Architecture
3442 @cindex @code{gdbarch} register architecture functions
3443
3444 These @code{struct gdbarch} functions and variables specify the number
3445 and type of registers in the architecture.
3446
3447 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR read_pc (struct regcache *@var{regcache})
3448 @end deftypefn
3449 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} void write_pc (struct regcache *@var{regcache}, CORE_ADDR @var{val})
3450
3451 Read or write the program counter. The default value of both
3452 functions is @code{NULL} (no function available). If the program
3453 counter is just an ordinary register, it can be specified in
3454 @code{struct gdbarch} instead (see @code{pc_regnum} below) and it will
3455 be read or written using the standard routines to access registers. This
3456 function need only be specified if the program counter is not an
3457 ordinary register.
3458
3459 Any register information can be obtained using the supplied register
3460 cache, @var{regcache}. @xref{Register Caching, , Register Caching}.
3461
3462 @end deftypefn
3463
3464 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} void pseudo_register_read (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, int @var{regnum}, const gdb_byte *@var{buf})
3465 @end deftypefn
3466 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} void pseudo_register_write (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, int @var{regnum}, const gdb_byte *@var{buf})
3467
3468 These functions should be defined if there are any pseudo-registers.
3469 The default value is @code{NULL}. @var{regnum} is the number of the
3470 register to read or write (which will be a @dfn{cooked} register
3471 number) and @var{buf} is the buffer where the value read will be
3472 placed, or from which the value to be written will be taken. The
3473 value in the buffer may be converted to or from a signed or unsigned
3474 integral value using one of the utility functions (@pxref{Register and
3475 Memory Data, , Using Different Register and Memory Data
3476 Representations}).
3477
3478 The access should be for the specified architecture,
3479 @var{gdbarch}. Any register information can be obtained using the
3480 supplied register cache, @var{regcache}. @xref{Register Caching, ,
3481 Register Caching}.
3482
3483 @end deftypefn
3484
3485 @deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int sp_regnum
3486 @vindex sp_regnum
3487 @cindex stack pointer
3488 @cindex @kbd{$sp}
3489
3490 This specifies the register holding the stack pointer, which may be a
3491 raw or pseudo-register. It defaults to -1 (not defined), but it is an
3492 error for it not to be defined.
3493
3494 The value of the stack pointer register can be accessed withing
3495 @value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$sp}.
3496
3497 @end deftypevr
3498
3499 @deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int pc_regnum
3500 @vindex pc_regnum
3501 @cindex program counter
3502 @cindex @kbd{$pc}
3503
3504 This specifies the register holding the program counter, which may be a
3505 raw or pseudo-register. It defaults to -1 (not defined). If
3506 @code{pc_regnum} is not defined, then the functions @code{read_pc} and
3507 @code{write_pc} (see above) must be defined.
3508
3509 The value of the program counter (whether defined as a register, or
3510 through @code{read_pc} and @code{write_pc}) can be accessed withing
3511 @value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$pc}.
3512
3513 @end deftypevr
3514
3515 @deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int ps_regnum
3516 @vindex ps_regnum
3517 @cindex processor status register
3518 @cindex status register
3519 @cindex @kbd{$ps}
3520
3521 This specifies the register holding the processor status (often called
3522 the status register), which may be a raw or pseudo-register. It
3523 defaults to -1 (not defined).
3524
3525 If defined, the value of this register can be accessed withing
3526 @value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$ps}.
3527
3528 @end deftypevr
3529
3530 @deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int fp0_regnum
3531 @vindex fp0_regnum
3532 @cindex first floating point register
3533
3534 This specifies the first floating point register. It defaults to
3535 0. @code{fp0_regnum} is not needed unless the target offers support
3536 for floating point.
3537
3538 @end deftypevr
3539
3540 @node Register Information Functions
3541 @subsection Functions Giving Register Information
3542 @cindex @code{gdbarch} register information functions
3543
3544 These functions return information about registers.
3545
3546 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} {const char *} register_name (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum})
3547
3548 This function should convert a register number (raw or pseudo) to a
3549 register name (as a C @code{const char *}). This is used both to
3550 determine the name of a register for output and to work out the meaning
3551 of any register names used as input. The function may also return
3552 @code{NULL}, to indicate that @var{regnum} is not a valid register.
3553
3554 For example with the OpenRISC 1000, @value{GDBN} registers 0-31 are the
3555 General Purpose Registers, register 32 is the program counter and
3556 register 33 is the supervision register (i.e.@: the processor status
3557 register), which map to the strings @code{"gpr00"} through
3558 @code{"gpr31"}, @code{"pc"} and @code{"sr"} respectively. This means
3559 that the @value{GDBN} command @kbd{print $gpr5} should print the value of
3560 the OR1K general purpose register 5@footnote{
3561 @cindex frame pointer
3562 @cindex @kbd{$fp}
3563 Historically, @value{GDBN} always had a concept of a frame pointer
3564 register, which could be accessed via the @value{GDBN} variable,
3565 @kbd{$fp}. That concept is now deprecated, recognizing that not all
3566 architectures have a frame pointer. However if an architecture does
3567 have a frame pointer register, and defines a register or
3568 pseudo-register with the name @code{"fp"}, then that register will be
3569 used as the value of the @kbd{$fp} variable.}.
3570
3571 The default value for this function is @code{NULL}, meaning
3572 undefined. It should always be defined.
3573
3574 The access should be for the specified architecture, @var{gdbarch}.
3575
3576 @end deftypefn
3577
3578 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct type *} register_type (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum})
3579
3580 Given a register number, this function identifies the type of data it
3581 may be holding, specified as a @code{struct type}. @value{GDBN} allows
3582 creation of arbitrary types, but a number of built in types are
3583 provided (@code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_int32} etc),
3584 together with functions to derive types from these.
3585
3586 Typically the program counter will have a type of ``pointer to
3587 function'' (it points to code), the frame pointer and stack pointer
3588 will have types of ``pointer to void'' (they point to data on the stack)
3589 and all other integer registers will have a type of 32-bit integer or
3590 64-bit integer.
3591
3592 This information guides the formatting when displaying register
3593 information. The default value is @code{NULL} meaning no information is
3594 available to guide formatting when displaying registers.
3595
3596 @end deftypefn
3597
3598 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_registers_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, int @var{regnum}, int @var{all})
3599
3600 Define this function to print out one or all of the registers for the
3601 @value{GDBN} @kbd{info registers} command. The default value is the
3602 function @code{default_print_registers_info}, which uses the register
3603 type information (see @code{register_type} above) to determine how each
3604 register should be printed. Define a custom version of this function
3605 for fuller control over how the registers are displayed.
3606
3607 The access should be for the specified architecture, @var{gdbarch},
3608 with output to the file specified by the User Interface
3609 Independent Output file handle, @var{file} (@pxref{UI-Independent
3610 Output, , UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out}
3611 Functions}).
3612
3613 The registers should show their values in the frame specified by
3614 @var{frame}. If @var{regnum} is -1 and @var{all} is zero, then all
3615 the ``significant'' registers should be shown (the implementer should
3616 decide which registers are ``significant''). Otherwise only the value of
3617 the register specified by @var{regnum} should be output. If
3618 @var{regnum} is -1 and @var{all} is non-zero (true), then the value of
3619 all registers should be shown.
3620
3621 By default @code{default_print_registers_info} prints one register per
3622 line, and if @var{all} is zero omits floating-point registers.
3623
3624 @end deftypefn
3625
3626 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_float_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, const char *@var{args})
3627
3628 Define this function to provide output about the floating point unit and
3629 registers for the @value{GDBN} @kbd{info float} command respectively.
3630 The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined), meaning no information
3631 will be provided.
3632
3633 The @var{gdbarch} and @var{file} and @var{frame} arguments have the same
3634 meaning as in the @code{print_registers_info} function above. The string
3635 @var{args} contains any supplementary arguments to the @kbd{info float}
3636 command.
3637
3638 Define this function if the target supports floating point operations.
3639
3640 @end deftypefn
3641
3642 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_vector_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, const char *@var{args})
3643
3644 Define this function to provide output about the vector unit and
3645 registers for the @value{GDBN} @kbd{info vector} command respectively.
3646 The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined), meaning no information
3647 will be provided.
3648
3649 The @var{gdbarch}, @var{file} and @var{frame} arguments have the
3650 same meaning as in the @code{print_registers_info} function above. The
3651 string @var{args} contains any supplementary arguments to the @kbd{info
3652 vector} command.
3653
3654 Define this function if the target supports vector operations.
3655
3656 @end deftypefn
3657
3658 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} int register_reggroup_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum}, struct reggroup *@var{group})
3659
3660 @value{GDBN} groups registers into different categories (general,
3661 vector, floating point etc). This function, given a register,
3662 @var{regnum}, and group, @var{group}, returns 1 (true) if the register
3663 is in the group and 0 (false) otherwise.
3664
3665 The information should be for the specified architecture,
3666 @var{gdbarch}
3667
3668 The default value is the function @code{default_register_reggroup_p}
3669 which will do a reasonable job based on the type of the register (see
3670 the function @code{register_type} above), with groups for general
3671 purpose registers, floating point registers, vector registers and raw
3672 (i.e not pseudo) registers.
3673
3674 @end deftypefn
3675
3676 @node Register and Memory Data
3677 @subsection Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations
3678 @cindex register representation
3679 @cindex memory representation
3680 @cindex representations, register and memory
3681 @cindex register data formats, converting
3682 @cindex @code{struct value}, converting register contents to
3683
3684 Some architectures have different representations of data objects,
3685 depending whether the object is held in a register or memory. For
3686 example:
3687
3688 @itemize @bullet
3689
3690 @item
3691 The Alpha architecture can represent 32 bit integer values in
3692 floating-point registers.
3693
3694 @item
3695 The x86 architecture supports 80-bit floating-point registers. The
3696 @code{long double} data type occupies 96 bits in memory but only 80
3697 bits when stored in a register.
3698
3699 @end itemize
3700
3701 In general, the register representation of a data type is determined by
3702 the architecture, or @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while
3703 the memory representation is determined by the Application Binary
3704 Interface.
3705
3706 For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the two
3707 representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3708 However, they do occasionally differ. An architecture may define the
3709 following @code{struct gdbarch} functions to request conversions
3710 between the register and memory representations of a data type:
3711
3712 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} int gdbarch_convert_register_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg})
3713
3714 Return non-zero (true) if the representation of a data value stored in
3715 this register may be different to the representation of that same data
3716 value when stored in memory. The default value is @code{NULL}
3717 (undefined).
3718
3719 If this function is defined and returns non-zero, the @code{struct
3720 gdbarch} functions @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3721 @code{gdbarch_value_to_register} (see below) should be used to perform
3722 any necessary conversion.
3723
3724 If defined, this function should return zero for the register's native
3725 type, when no conversion is necessary.
3726 @end deftypefn
3727
3728 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} void gdbarch_register_to_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3729
3730 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to a data object of
3731 type @var{type}. The buffer at @var{from} holds the register's value
3732 in raw format; the converted value should be placed in the buffer at
3733 @var{to}.
3734
3735 @quotation
3736 @emph{Note:} @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3737 @code{gdbarch_value_to_register} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3738 arguments in different orders.
3739 @end quotation
3740
3741 @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} should only be used with registers
3742 for which the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a
3743 non-zero value.
3744
3745 @end deftypefn
3746
3747 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} void gdbarch_value_to_register (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3748
3749 Convert a data value of type @var{type} to register number @var{reg}'
3750 raw format.
3751
3752 @quotation
3753 @emph{Note:} @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3754 @code{gdbarch_value_to_register} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3755 arguments in different orders.
3756 @end quotation
3757
3758 @code{gdbarch_value_to_register} should only be used with registers
3759 for which the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a
3760 non-zero value.
3761
3762 @end deftypefn
3763
3764 @node Register Caching
3765 @subsection Register Caching
3766 @cindex register caching
3767
3768 Caching of registers is used, so that the target does not need to be
3769 accessed and reanalyzed multiple times for each register in
3770 circumstances where the register value cannot have changed.
3771
3772 @cindex @code{struct regcache}
3773 @value{GDBN} provides @code{struct regcache}, associated with a
3774 particular @code{struct gdbarch} to hold the cached values of the raw
3775 registers. A set of functions is provided to access both the raw
3776 registers (with @code{raw} in their name) and the full set of cooked
3777 registers (with @code{cooked} in their name). Functions are provided
3778 to ensure the register cache is kept synchronized with the values of
3779 the actual registers in the target.
3780
3781 Accessing registers through the @code{struct regcache} routines will
3782 ensure that the appropriate @code{struct gdbarch} functions are called
3783 when necessary to access the underlying target architecture. In general
3784 users should use the @dfn{cooked} functions, since these will map to the
3785 @dfn{raw} functions automatically as appropriate.
3786
3787 @findex regcache_cooked_read
3788 @findex regcache_cooked_write
3789 @cindex @code{gdb_byte}
3790 @findex regcache_cooked_read_signed
3791 @findex regcache_cooked_read_unsigned
3792 @findex regcache_cooked_write_signed
3793 @findex regcache_cooked_write_unsigned
3794 The two key functions are @code{regcache_cooked_read} and
3795 @code{regcache_cooked_write} which read or write a register from or to
3796 a byte buffer (type @code{gdb_byte *}). For convenience the wrapper
3797 functions @code{regcache_cooked_read_signed},
3798 @code{regcache_cooked_read_unsigned},
3799 @code{regcache_cooked_write_signed} and
3800 @code{regcache_cooked_write_unsigned} are provided, which read or
3801 write the value using the buffer and convert to or from an integral
3802 value as appropriate.
3803
3804 @node Frame Interpretation
3805 @section Frame Interpretation
3806
3807 @menu
3808 * All About Stack Frames::
3809 * Frame Handling Terminology::
3810 * Prologue Caches::
3811 * Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames::
3812 * Functions to Access Frame Data::
3813 * Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers::
3814 @end menu
3815
3816 @node All About Stack Frames
3817 @subsection All About Stack Frames
3818
3819 @value{GDBN} needs to understand the stack on which local (automatic)
3820 variables are stored. The area of the stack containing all the local
3821 variables for a function invocation is known as the @dfn{stack frame}
3822 for that function (or colloquially just as the @dfn{frame}). In turn the
3823 function that called the function will have its stack frame, and so on
3824 back through the chain of functions that have been called.
3825
3826 Almost all architectures have one register dedicated to point to the
3827 end of the stack (the @dfn{stack pointer}). Many have a second register
3828 which points to the start of the currently active stack frame (the
3829 @dfn{frame pointer}). The specific arrangements for an architecture are
3830 a key part of the ABI.
3831
3832 A diagram helps to explain this. Here is a simple program to compute
3833 factorials:
3834
3835 @smallexample
3836 #include <stdio.h>
3837 int fact (int n)
3838 @{
3839 if (0 == n)
3840 @{
3841 return 1;
3842 @}
3843 else
3844 @{
3845 return n * fact (n - 1);
3846 @}
3847 @}
3848
3849 main ()
3850 @{
3851 int i;
3852
3853 for (i = 0; i < 10; i++)
3854 @{
3855 int f = fact (i);
3856 printf ("%d! = %d\n", i, f);
3857 @}
3858 @}
3859 @end smallexample
3860
3861 Consider the state of the stack when the code reaches line 6 after the
3862 main program has called @code{fact@w{ }(3)}. The chain of function
3863 calls will be @code{main ()}, @code{fact@w{ }(3)}, @code{fact@w{
3864 }(2)}, @code{@w{fact (1)}} and @code{fact@w{ }(0)}.
3865
3866 In this illustration the stack is falling (as used for example by the
3867 OpenRISC 1000 ABI). The stack pointer (SP) is at the end of the stack
3868 (lowest address) and the frame pointer (FP) is at the highest address
3869 in the current stack frame. The following diagram shows how the stack
3870 looks.
3871
3872 @center @image{stack_frame,14cm}
3873
3874 In each stack frame, offset 0 from the stack pointer is the frame
3875 pointer of the previous frame and offset 4 (this is illustrating a
3876 32-bit architecture) from the stack pointer is the return address.
3877 Local variables are indexed from the frame pointer, with negative
3878 indexes. In the function @code{fact}, offset -4 from the frame
3879 pointer is the argument @var{n}. In the @code{main} function, offset
3880 -4 from the frame pointer is the local variable @var{i} and offset -8
3881 from the frame pointer is the local variable @var{f}@footnote{This is
3882 a simplified example for illustrative purposes only. Good optimizing
3883 compilers would not put anything on the stack for such simple
3884 functions. Indeed they might eliminate the recursion and use of the
3885 stack entirely!}.
3886
3887 It is very easy to get confused when examining stacks. @value{GDBN}
3888 has terminology it uses rigorously throughout. The stack frame of the
3889 function currently executing, or where execution stopped is numbered
3890 zero. In this example frame #0 is the stack frame of the call to
3891 @code{fact@w{ }(0)}. The stack frame of its calling function
3892 (@code{fact@w{ }(1)} in this case) is numbered #1 and so on back
3893 through the chain of calls.
3894
3895 The main @value{GDBN} data structure describing frames is
3896 @code{@w{struct frame_info}}. It is not used directly, but only via
3897 its accessor functions. @code{frame_info} includes information about
3898 the registers in the frame and a pointer to the code of the function
3899 with which the frame is associated. The entire stack is represented as
3900 a linked list of @code{frame_info} structs.
3901
3902 @node Frame Handling Terminology
3903 @subsection Frame Handling Terminology
3904
3905 It is easy to get confused when referencing stack frames. @value{GDBN}
3906 uses some precise terminology.
3907
3908 @itemize @bullet
3909
3910 @item
3911 @cindex THIS frame
3912 @cindex stack frame, definition of THIS frame
3913 @cindex frame, definition of THIS frame
3914 @dfn{THIS} frame is the frame currently under consideration.
3915
3916 @item
3917 @cindex NEXT frame
3918 @cindex stack frame, definition of NEXT frame
3919 @cindex frame, definition of NEXT frame
3920 The @dfn{NEXT} frame, also sometimes called the inner or newer frame is the
3921 frame of the function called by the function of THIS frame.
3922
3923 @item
3924 @cindex PREVIOUS frame
3925 @cindex stack frame, definition of PREVIOUS frame
3926 @cindex frame, definition of PREVIOUS frame
3927 The @dfn{PREVIOUS} frame, also sometimes called the outer or older frame is
3928 the frame of the function which called the function of THIS frame.
3929
3930 @end itemize
3931
3932 So in the example in the previous section (@pxref{All About Stack
3933 Frames, , All About Stack Frames}), if THIS frame is #3 (the call to
3934 @code{fact@w{ }(3)}), the NEXT frame is frame #2 (the call to
3935 @code{fact@w{ }(2)}) and the PREVIOUS frame is frame #4 (the call to
3936 @code{main@w{ }()}).
3937
3938 @cindex innermost frame
3939 @cindex stack frame, definition of innermost frame
3940 @cindex frame, definition of innermost frame
3941 The @dfn{innermost} frame is the frame of the current executing
3942 function, or where the program stopped, in this example, in the middle
3943 of the call to @code{@w{fact (0))}}. It is always numbered frame #0.
3944
3945 @cindex base of a frame
3946 @cindex stack frame, definition of base of a frame
3947 @cindex frame, definition of base of a frame
3948 The @dfn{base} of a frame is the address immediately before the start
3949 of the NEXT frame. For a stack which grows down in memory (a
3950 @dfn{falling} stack) this will be the lowest address and for a stack
3951 which grows up in memory (a @dfn{rising} stack) this will be the
3952 highest address in the frame.
3953
3954 @value{GDBN} functions to analyze the stack are typically given a
3955 pointer to the NEXT frame to determine information about THIS
3956 frame. Information about THIS frame includes data on where the
3957 registers of the PREVIOUS frame are stored in this stack frame. In
3958 this example the frame pointer of the PREVIOUS frame is stored at
3959 offset 0 from the stack pointer of THIS frame.
3960
3961 @cindex unwinding
3962 @cindex stack frame, definition of unwinding
3963 @cindex frame, definition of unwinding
3964 The process whereby a function is given a pointer to the NEXT
3965 frame to work out information about THIS frame is referred to as
3966 @dfn{unwinding}. The @value{GDBN} functions involved in this typically
3967 include unwind in their name.
3968
3969 @cindex sniffing
3970 @cindex stack frame, definition of sniffing
3971 @cindex frame, definition of sniffing
3972 The process of analyzing a target to determine the information that
3973 should go in struct frame_info is called @dfn{sniffing}. The functions
3974 that carry this out are called sniffers and typically include sniffer
3975 in their name. More than one sniffer may be required to extract all
3976 the information for a particular frame.
3977
3978 @cindex sentinel frame
3979 @cindex stack frame, definition of sentinel frame
3980 @cindex frame, definition of sentinel frame
3981 Because so many functions work using the NEXT frame, there is an issue
3982 about addressing the innermost frame---it has no NEXT frame. To solve
3983 this @value{GDBN} creates a dummy frame #-1, known as the
3984 @dfn{sentinel} frame.
3985
3986 @node Prologue Caches
3987 @subsection Prologue Caches
3988
3989 @cindex function prologue
3990 @cindex prologue of a function
3991 All the frame sniffing functions typically examine the code at the
3992 start of the corresponding function, to determine the state of
3993 registers. The ABI will save old values and set new values of key
3994 registers at the start of each function in what is known as the
3995 function @dfn{prologue}.
3996
3997 @cindex prologue cache
3998 For any particular stack frame this data does not change, so all the
3999 standard unwinding functions, in addition to receiving a pointer to
4000 the NEXT frame as their first argument, receive a pointer to a
4001 @dfn{prologue cache} as their second argument. This can be used to store
4002 values associated with a particular frame, for reuse on subsequent
4003 calls involving the same frame.
4004
4005 It is up to the user to define the structure used (it is a
4006 @code{void@w{ }*} pointer) and arrange allocation and deallocation of
4007 storage. However for general use, @value{GDBN} provides
4008 @code{@w{struct trad_frame_cache}}, with a set of accessor
4009 routines. This structure holds the stack and code address of
4010 THIS frame, the base address of the frame, a pointer to the
4011 struct @code{frame_info} for the NEXT frame and details of
4012 where the registers of the PREVIOUS frame may be found in THIS
4013 frame.
4014
4015 Typically the first time any sniffer function is called with NEXT
4016 frame, the prologue sniffer for THIS frame will be @code{NULL}. The
4017 sniffer will analyze the frame, allocate a prologue cache structure
4018 and populate it. Subsequent calls using the same NEXT frame will
4019 pass in this prologue cache, so the data can be returned with no
4020 additional analysis.
4021
4022 @node Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames
4023 @subsection Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames
4024
4025 These struct @code{gdbarch} functions and variable should be defined
4026 to provide analysis of the stack frame and allow it to be adjusted as
4027 required.
4028
4029 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR skip_prologue (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{pc})
4030
4031 The prologue of a function is the code at the beginning of the
4032 function which sets up the stack frame, saves the return address
4033 etc. The code representing the behavior of the function starts after
4034 the prologue.
4035
4036 This function skips past the prologue of a function if the program
4037 counter, @var{pc}, is within the prologue of a function. The result is
4038 the program counter immediately after the prologue. With modern
4039 optimizing compilers, this may be a far from trivial exercise. However
4040 the required information may be within the binary as DWARF2 debugging
4041 information, making the job much easier.
4042
4043 The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined). This function should always
4044 be provided, but can take advantage of DWARF2 debugging information,
4045 if that is available.
4046
4047 @end deftypefn
4048
4049 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} int inner_than (CORE_ADDR @var{lhs}, CORE_ADDR @var{rhs})
4050 @findex core_addr_lessthan
4051 @findex core_addr_greaterthan
4052
4053 Given two frame or stack pointers, return non-zero (true) if the first
4054 represents the @dfn{inner} stack frame and 0 (false) otherwise. This
4055 is used to determine whether the target has a stack which grows up in
4056 memory (rising stack) or grows down in memory (falling stack).
4057 @xref{All About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames}, for an
4058 explanation of @dfn{inner} frames.
4059
4060 The default value of this function is @code{NULL} and it should always
4061 be defined. However for almost all architectures one of the built-in
4062 functions can be used: @code{core_addr_lessthan} (for stacks growing
4063 down in memory) or @code{core_addr_greaterthan} (for stacks growing up
4064 in memory).
4065
4066 @end deftypefn
4067
4068 @anchor{frame_align}
4069 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR frame_align (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
4070 @findex align_down
4071 @findex align_up
4072
4073 The architecture may have constraints on how its frames are
4074 aligned. For example the OpenRISC 1000 ABI requires stack frames to be
4075 double-word aligned, but 32-bit versions of the architecture allocate
4076 single-word values to the stack. Thus extra padding may be needed at
4077 the end of a stack frame.
4078
4079 Given a proposed address for the stack pointer, this function
4080 returns a suitably aligned address (by expanding the stack frame).
4081
4082 The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined). This function should be defined
4083 for any architecture where it is possible the stack could become
4084 misaligned. The utility functions @code{align_down} (for falling
4085 stacks) and @code{align_up} (for rising stacks) will facilitate the
4086 implementation of this function.
4087
4088 @end deftypefn
4089
4090 @deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int frame_red_zone_size
4091
4092 Some ABIs reserve space beyond the end of the stack for use by leaf
4093 functions without prologue or epilogue or by exception handlers (for
4094 example the OpenRISC 1000).
4095
4096 This is known as a @dfn{red zone} (AMD terminology). The @sc{amd64}
4097 (nee x86-64) ABI documentation refers to the @dfn{red zone} when
4098 describing this scratch area.
4099
4100 The default value is 0. Set this field if the architecture has such a
4101 red zone. The value must be aligned as required by the ABI (see
4102 @code{frame_align} above for an explanation of stack frame alignment).
4103
4104 @end deftypevr
4105
4106 @node Functions to Access Frame Data
4107 @subsection Functions to Access Frame Data
4108
4109 These functions provide access to key registers and arguments in the
4110 stack frame.
4111
4112 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR unwind_pc (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4113
4114 This function is given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame (@pxref{All
4115 About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames}, for how frames are
4116 represented) and returns the value of the program counter in the
4117 PREVIOUS frame (i.e.@: the frame of the function that called THIS
4118 one). This is commonly referred to as the @dfn{return address}.
4119
4120 The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
4121 is typically no more than:
4122
4123 @smallexample
4124 ULONGEST pc;
4125 pc = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, @var{ARCH}_PC_REGNUM);
4126 return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, pc);
4127 @end smallexample
4128
4129 @end deftypefn
4130
4131 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR unwind_sp (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4132
4133 This function is given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame
4134 (@pxref{All About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames} for how
4135 frames are represented) and returns the value of the stack pointer in
4136 the PREVIOUS frame (i.e.@: the frame of the function that called
4137 THIS one).
4138
4139 The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
4140 is typically no more than:
4141
4142 @smallexample
4143 ULONGEST sp;
4144 sp = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, @var{ARCH}_SP_REGNUM);
4145 return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, sp);
4146 @end smallexample
4147
4148 @end deftypefn
4149
4150 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} int frame_num_args (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{this_frame})
4151
4152 This function is given a pointer to THIS stack frame (@pxref{All
4153 About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames} for how frames are
4154 represented), and returns the number of arguments that are being
4155 passed, or -1 if not known.
4156
4157 The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined), in which case the number of
4158 arguments passed on any stack frame is always unknown. For many
4159 architectures this will be a suitable default.
4160
4161 @end deftypefn
4162
4163 @node Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers
4164 @subsection Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers
4165
4166 When a program stops, @value{GDBN} needs to construct the chain of
4167 struct @code{frame_info} representing the state of the stack using
4168 appropriate @dfn{sniffers}.
4169
4170 Each architecture requires appropriate sniffers, but they do not form
4171 entries in @code{@w{struct gdbarch}}, since more than one sniffer may
4172 be required and a sniffer may be suitable for more than one
4173 @code{@w{struct gdbarch}}. Instead sniffers are associated with
4174 architectures using the following functions.
4175
4176 @itemize @bullet
4177
4178 @item
4179 @findex frame_unwind_append_sniffer
4180 @code{frame_unwind_append_sniffer} is used to add a new sniffer to
4181 analyze THIS frame when given a pointer to the NEXT frame.
4182
4183 @item
4184 @findex frame_base_append_sniffer
4185 @code{frame_base_append_sniffer} is used to add a new sniffer
4186 which can determine information about the base of a stack frame.
4187
4188 @item
4189 @findex frame_base_set_default
4190 @code{frame_base_set_default} is used to specify the default base
4191 sniffer.
4192
4193 @end itemize
4194
4195 These functions all take a reference to @code{@w{struct gdbarch}}, so
4196 they are associated with a specific architecture. They are usually
4197 called in the @code{gdbarch} initialization function, after the
4198 @code{gdbarch} struct has been set up. Unless a default has been set, the
4199 most recently appended sniffer will be tried first.
4200
4201 The main frame unwinding sniffer (as set by
4202 @code{frame_unwind_append_sniffer)} returns a structure specifying
4203 a set of sniffing functions:
4204
4205 @cindex @code{frame_unwind}
4206 @smallexample
4207 struct frame_unwind
4208 @{
4209 enum frame_type type;
4210 frame_this_id_ftype *this_id;
4211 frame_prev_register_ftype *prev_register;
4212 const struct frame_data *unwind_data;
4213 frame_sniffer_ftype *sniffer;
4214 frame_prev_pc_ftype *prev_pc;
4215 frame_dealloc_cache_ftype *dealloc_cache;
4216 @};
4217 @end smallexample
4218
4219 The @code{type} field indicates the type of frame this sniffer can
4220 handle: normal, dummy (@pxref{Functions Creating Dummy Frames, ,
4221 Functions Creating Dummy Frames}), signal handler or sentinel. Signal
4222 handlers sometimes have their own simplified stack structure for
4223 efficiency, so may need their own handlers.
4224
4225 The @code{unwind_data} field holds additional information which may be
4226 relevant to particular types of frame. For example it may hold
4227 additional information for signal handler frames.
4228
4229 The remaining fields define functions that yield different types of
4230 information when given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame. Not all
4231 functions need be provided. If an entry is @code{NULL}, the next sniffer will
4232 be tried instead.
4233
4234 @itemize @bullet
4235
4236 @item
4237 @code{this_id} determines the stack pointer and function (code
4238 entry point) for THIS stack frame.
4239
4240 @item
4241 @code{prev_register} determines where the values of registers for
4242 the PREVIOUS stack frame are stored in THIS stack frame.
4243
4244 @item
4245 @code{sniffer} takes a look at THIS frame's registers to
4246 determine if this is the appropriate unwinder.
4247
4248 @item
4249 @code{prev_pc} determines the program counter for THIS
4250 frame. Only needed if the program counter is not an ordinary register
4251 (@pxref{Register Architecture Functions & Variables,
4252 , Functions and Variables Specifying the Register Architecture}).
4253
4254 @item
4255 @code{dealloc_cache} frees any additional memory associated with
4256 the prologue cache for this frame (@pxref{Prologue Caches, , Prologue
4257 Caches}).
4258
4259 @end itemize
4260
4261 In general it is only the @code{this_id} and @code{prev_register}
4262 fields that need be defined for custom sniffers.
4263
4264 The frame base sniffer is much simpler. It is a @code{@w{struct
4265 frame_base}}, which refers to the corresponding @code{frame_unwind}
4266 struct and whose fields refer to functions yielding various addresses
4267 within the frame.
4268
4269 @cindex @code{frame_base}
4270 @smallexample
4271 struct frame_base
4272 @{
4273 const struct frame_unwind *unwind;
4274 frame_this_base_ftype *this_base;
4275 frame_this_locals_ftype *this_locals;
4276 frame_this_args_ftype *this_args;
4277 @};
4278 @end smallexample
4279
4280 All the functions referred to take a pointer to the NEXT frame as
4281 argument. The function referred to by @code{this_base} returns the
4282 base address of THIS frame, the function referred to by
4283 @code{this_locals} returns the base address of local variables in THIS
4284 frame and the function referred to by @code{this_args} returns the
4285 base address of the function arguments in this frame.
4286
4287 As described above, the base address of a frame is the address
4288 immediately before the start of the NEXT frame. For a falling
4289 stack, this is the lowest address in the frame and for a rising stack
4290 it is the highest address in the frame. For most architectures the
4291 same address is also the base address for local variables and
4292 arguments, in which case the same function can be used for all three
4293 entries@footnote{It is worth noting that if it cannot be determined in any
4294 other way (for example by there being a register with the name
4295 @code{"fp"}), then the result of the @code{this_base} function will be
4296 used as the value of the frame pointer variable @kbd{$fp} in
4297 @value{GDBN}. This is very often not correct (for example with the
4298 OpenRISC 1000, this value is the stack pointer, @kbd{$sp}). In this
4299 case a register (raw or pseudo) with the name @code{"fp"} should be
4300 defined. It will be used in preference as the value of @kbd{$fp}.}.
4301
4302 @node Inferior Call Setup
4303 @section Inferior Call Setup
4304 @cindex calls to the inferior
4305
4306 @menu
4307 * About Dummy Frames::
4308 * Functions Creating Dummy Frames::
4309 @end menu
4310
4311 @node About Dummy Frames
4312 @subsection About Dummy Frames
4313 @cindex dummy frames
4314
4315 @value{GDBN} can call functions in the target code (for example by
4316 using the @kbd{call} or @kbd{print} commands). These functions may be
4317 breakpointed, and it is essential that if a function does hit a
4318 breakpoint, commands like @kbd{backtrace} work correctly.
4319
4320 This is achieved by making the stack look as though the function had
4321 been called from the point where @value{GDBN} had previously stopped.
4322 This requires that @value{GDBN} can set up stack frames appropriate for
4323 such function calls.
4324
4325 @node Functions Creating Dummy Frames
4326 @subsection Functions Creating Dummy Frames
4327
4328 The following functions provide the functionality to set up such
4329 @dfn{dummy} stack frames.
4330
4331 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR push_dummy_call (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct value *@var{function}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, CORE_ADDR @var{bp_addr}, int @var{nargs}, struct value **@var{args}, CORE_ADDR @var{sp}, int @var{struct_return}, CORE_ADDR @var{struct_addr})
4332
4333 This function sets up a dummy stack frame for the function about to be
4334 called. @code{push_dummy_call} is given the arguments to be passed
4335 and must copy them into registers or push them on to the stack as
4336 appropriate for the ABI.
4337
4338 @var{function} is a pointer to the function
4339 that will be called and @var{regcache} the register cache from which
4340 values should be obtained. @var{bp_addr} is the address to which the
4341 function should return (which is breakpointed, so @value{GDBN} can
4342 regain control, hence the name). @var{nargs} is the number of
4343 arguments to pass and @var{args} an array containing the argument
4344 values. @var{struct_return} is non-zero (true) if the function returns
4345 a structure, and if so @var{struct_addr} is the address in which the
4346 structure should be returned.
4347
4348 After calling this function, @value{GDBN} will pass control to the
4349 target at the address of the function, which will find the stack and
4350 registers set up just as expected.
4351
4352 The default value of this function is @code{NULL} (undefined). If the
4353 function is not defined, then @value{GDBN} will not allow the user to
4354 call functions within the target being debugged.
4355
4356 @end deftypefn
4357
4358 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct frame_id} unwind_dummy_id (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4359
4360 This is the inverse of @code{push_dummy_call} which restores the stack
4361 pointer and program counter after a call to evaluate a function using
4362 a dummy stack frame. The result is a @code{@w{struct frame_id}}, which
4363 contains the value of the stack pointer and program counter to be
4364 used.
4365
4366 The NEXT frame pointer is provided as argument,
4367 @var{next_frame}. THIS frame is the frame of the dummy function,
4368 which can be unwound, to yield the required stack pointer and program
4369 counter from the PREVIOUS frame.
4370
4371 The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined). If @code{push_dummy_call} is
4372 defined, then this function should also be defined.
4373
4374 @end deftypefn
4375
4376 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR push_dummy_code (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{sp}, CORE_ADDR @var{funaddr}, struct value **@var{args}, int @var{nargs}, struct type *@var{value_type}, CORE_ADDR *@var{real_pc}, CORE_ADDR *@var{bp_addr}, struct regcache *@var{regcache})
4377
4378 If this function is not defined (its default value is @code{NULL}), a dummy
4379 call will use the entry point of the currently loaded code on the
4380 target as its return address. A temporary breakpoint will be set
4381 there, so the location must be writable and have room for a
4382 breakpoint.
4383
4384 It is possible that this default is not suitable. It might not be
4385 writable (in ROM possibly), or the ABI might require code to be
4386 executed on return from a call to unwind the stack before the
4387 breakpoint is encountered.
4388
4389 If either of these is the case, then push_dummy_code should be defined
4390 to push an instruction sequence onto the end of the stack to which the
4391 dummy call should return.
4392
4393 The arguments are essentially the same as those to
4394 @code{push_dummy_call}. However the function is provided with the
4395 type of the function result, @var{value_type}, @var{bp_addr} is used
4396 to return a value (the address at which the breakpoint instruction
4397 should be inserted) and @var{real pc} is used to specify the resume
4398 address when starting the call sequence. The function should return
4399 the updated innermost stack address.
4400
4401 @quotation
4402 @emph{Note:} This does require that code in the stack can be executed.
4403 Some Harvard architectures may not allow this.
4404 @end quotation
4405
4406 @end deftypefn
4407
4408 @node Adding support for debugging core files
4409 @section Adding support for debugging core files
4410 @cindex core files
4411
4412 The prerequisite for adding core file support in @value{GDBN} is to have
4413 core file support in BFD.
4414
4415 Once BFD support is available, writing the apropriate
4416 @code{regset_from_core_section} architecture function should be all
4417 that is needed in order to add support for core files in @value{GDBN}.
4418
4419 @node Defining Other Architecture Features
4420 @section Defining Other Architecture Features
4421
4422 This section describes other functions and values in @code{gdbarch},
4423 together with some useful macros, that you can use to define the
4424 target architecture.
4425
4426 @table @code
4427
4428 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
4429 @findex gdbarch_addr_bits_remove
4430 If a raw machine instruction address includes any bits that are not
4431 really part of the address, then this function is used to zero those bits in
4432 @var{addr}. This is only used for addresses of instructions, and even then not
4433 in all contexts.
4434
4435 For example, the two low-order bits of the PC on the Hewlett-Packard PA
4436 2.0 architecture contain the privilege level of the corresponding
4437 instruction. Since instructions must always be aligned on four-byte
4438 boundaries, the processor masks out these bits to generate the actual
4439 address of the instruction. @code{gdbarch_addr_bits_remove} would then for
4440 example look like that:
4441 @smallexample
4442 arch_addr_bits_remove (CORE_ADDR addr)
4443 @{
4444 return (addr &= ~0x3);
4445 @}
4446 @end smallexample
4447
4448 @item int address_class_name_to_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{name}, @var{type_flags_ptr})
4449 @findex address_class_name_to_type_flags
4450 If @var{name} is a valid address class qualifier name, set the @code{int}
4451 referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the mask representing the qualifier
4452 and return 1. If @var{name} is not a valid address class qualifier name,
4453 return 0.
4454
4455 The value for @var{type_flags_ptr} should be one of
4456 @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1}, @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or
4457 possibly some combination of these values or'd together.
4458 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4459
4460 @item int address_class_name_to_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
4461 @findex address_class_name_to_type_flags_p
4462 Predicate which indicates whether @code{address_class_name_to_type_flags}
4463 has been defined.
4464
4465 @item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{byte_size}, @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
4466 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags
4467 Given a pointers byte size (as described by the debug information) and
4468 the possible @code{DW_AT_address_class} value, return the type flags
4469 used by @value{GDBN} to represent this address class. The value
4470 returned should be one of @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1},
4471 @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or possibly some combination of these
4472 values or'd together.
4473 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4474
4475 @item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
4476 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p
4477 Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p} has
4478 been defined.
4479
4480 @item const char *gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type_flags})
4481 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name
4482 Return the name of the address class qualifier associated with the type
4483 flags given by @var{type_flags}.
4484
4485 @item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p (@var{gdbarch})
4486 @findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p
4487 Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name} has been defined.
4488 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4489
4490 @item void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf}, @var{addr})
4491 @findex gdbarch_address_to_pointer
4492 Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
4493 @var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
4494 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
4495 C@t{++} reference type.
4496 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
4497
4498 @item int gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion (@var{gdbarch})
4499 @findex gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion
4500 Used to notify if the compiler promotes a @code{short} or @code{char}
4501 parameter to an @code{int}, but still reports the parameter as its
4502 original type, rather than the promoted type.
4503
4504 @item gdbarch_bits_big_endian (@var{gdbarch})
4505 @findex gdbarch_bits_big_endian
4506 This is used if the numbering of bits in the targets does @strong{not} match
4507 the endianism of the target byte order. A value of 1 means that the bits
4508 are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 means little-endian.
4509
4510 @item set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bits_big_endian})
4511 @findex set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian
4512 Calling set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian with a value of 1 indicates that the
4513 bits in the target are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 indicates
4514 little-endian.
4515
4516 @item BREAKPOINT
4517 @findex BREAKPOINT
4518 This is the character array initializer for the bit pattern to put into
4519 memory where a breakpoint is set. Although it's common to use a trap
4520 instruction for a breakpoint, it's not required; for instance, the bit
4521 pattern could be an invalid instruction. The breakpoint must be no
4522 longer than the shortest instruction of the architecture.
4523
4524 @code{BREAKPOINT} has been deprecated in favor of
4525 @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
4526
4527 @item BIG_BREAKPOINT
4528 @itemx LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
4529 @findex LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
4530 @findex BIG_BREAKPOINT
4531 Similar to BREAKPOINT, but used for bi-endian targets.
4532
4533 @code{BIG_BREAKPOINT} and @code{LITTLE_BREAKPOINT} have been deprecated in
4534 favor of @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
4535
4536 @item const gdb_byte *gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pcptr}, @var{lenptr})
4537 @findex gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc
4538 @anchor{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} Use the program counter to determine the
4539 contents and size of a breakpoint instruction. It returns a pointer to
4540 a static string of bytes that encode a breakpoint instruction, stores the
4541 length of the string to @code{*@var{lenptr}}, and adjusts the program
4542 counter (if necessary) to point to the actual memory location where the
4543 breakpoint should be inserted. May return @code{NULL} to indicate that
4544 software breakpoints are not supported.
4545
4546 Although it is common to use a trap instruction for a breakpoint, it's
4547 not required; for instance, the bit pattern could be an invalid
4548 instruction. The breakpoint must be no longer than the shortest
4549 instruction of the architecture.
4550
4551 Provided breakpoint bytes can be also used by @code{bp_loc_is_permanent} to
4552 detect permanent breakpoints. @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} should return
4553 an unchanged memory copy if it was called for a location with permanent
4554 breakpoint as some architectures use breakpoint instructions containing
4555 arbitrary parameter value.
4556
4557 Replaces all the other @var{BREAKPOINT} macros.
4558
4559 @item int gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
4560 @itemx gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
4561 @findex gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint
4562 @findex gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint
4563 Insert or remove memory based breakpoints. Reasonable defaults
4564 (@code{default_memory_insert_breakpoint} and
4565 @code{default_memory_remove_breakpoint} respectively) have been
4566 provided so that it is not necessary to set these for most
4567 architectures. Architectures which may want to set
4568 @code{gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint} and @code{gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint} will likely have instructions that are oddly sized or are not stored in a
4569 conventional manner.
4570
4571 It may also be desirable (from an efficiency standpoint) to define
4572 custom breakpoint insertion and removal routines if
4573 @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} needs to read the target's memory for some
4574 reason.
4575
4576 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bpaddr})
4577 @findex gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address
4578 @cindex breakpoint address adjusted
4579 Given an address at which a breakpoint is desired, return a breakpoint
4580 address adjusted to account for architectural constraints on
4581 breakpoint placement. This method is not needed by most targets.
4582
4583 The FR-V target (see @file{frv-tdep.c}) requires this method.
4584 The FR-V is a VLIW architecture in which a number of RISC-like
4585 instructions are grouped (packed) together into an aggregate
4586 instruction or instruction bundle. When the processor executes
4587 one of these bundles, the component instructions are executed
4588 in parallel.
4589
4590 In the course of optimization, the compiler may group instructions
4591 from distinct source statements into the same bundle. The line number
4592 information associated with one of the latter statements will likely
4593 refer to some instruction other than the first one in the bundle. So,
4594 if the user attempts to place a breakpoint on one of these latter
4595 statements, @value{GDBN} must be careful to @emph{not} place the break
4596 instruction on any instruction other than the first one in the bundle.
4597 (Remember though that the instructions within a bundle execute
4598 in parallel, so the @emph{first} instruction is the instruction
4599 at the lowest address and has nothing to do with execution order.)
4600
4601 The FR-V's @code{gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address} method will adjust a
4602 breakpoint's address by scanning backwards for the beginning of
4603 the bundle, returning the address of the bundle.
4604
4605 Since the adjustment of a breakpoint may significantly alter a user's
4606 expectation, @value{GDBN} prints a warning when an adjusted breakpoint
4607 is initially set and each time that that breakpoint is hit.
4608
4609 @item int gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})
4610 @findex gdbarch_call_dummy_location
4611 See the file @file{inferior.h}.
4612
4613 This method has been replaced by @code{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}
4614 (@pxref{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}).
4615
4616 @item int gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regum})
4617 @findex gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register
4618 This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} cannot be fetched
4619 from an inferior process.
4620
4621 @item int gdbarch_cannot_store_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum})
4622 @findex gdbarch_cannot_store_register
4623 This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} should not be
4624 written to the target. This is often the case for program counters,
4625 status words, and other special registers. This function returns 0 as
4626 default so that @value{GDBN} will assume that all registers may be written.
4627
4628 @item int gdbarch_convert_register_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type})
4629 @findex gdbarch_convert_register_p
4630 Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} represents data values of type
4631 @var{type} in a non-standard form.
4632 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4633
4634 @item int gdbarch_fp0_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4635 @findex gdbarch_fp0_regnum
4636 This function returns the number of the first floating point register,
4637 if the machine has such registers. Otherwise, it returns -1.
4638
4639 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break (@var{gdbarch})
4640 @findex gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break
4641 This function shall return the amount by which to decrement the PC after the
4642 program encounters a breakpoint. This is often the number of bytes in
4643 @code{BREAKPOINT}, though not always. For most targets this value will be 0.
4644
4645 @item DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK (@var{addr})
4646 @findex DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK
4647 If defined, this should evaluate to 1 if @var{addr} is in a shared
4648 library in which breakpoints cannot be set and so should be disabled.
4649
4650 @item int gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{dwarf2_regnr})
4651 @findex gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum
4652 Convert DWARF2 register number @var{dwarf2_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.
4653 If not defined, no conversion will be performed.
4654
4655 @item int gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{ecoff_regnr})
4656 @findex gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum
4657 Convert ECOFF register number @var{ecoff_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum. If
4658 not defined, no conversion will be performed.
4659
4660 @item GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4661 @itemx GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4662 @findex GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4663 @findex GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4664 If defined, these are the names of the symbols that @value{GDBN} will
4665 look for to detect that GCC compiled the file. The default symbols
4666 are @code{gcc_compiled.} and @code{gcc2_compiled.},
4667 respectively. (Currently only defined for the Delta 68.)
4668
4669 @item gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4670 @findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4671 This function determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp}
4672 will jump to, assuming that we have just stopped at a @code{longjmp}
4673 breakpoint. It takes a @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the
4674 target PC value through this pointer. It examines the current state
4675 of the machine as needed, typically by using a manually-determined
4676 offset into the @code{jmp_buf}. (While we might like to get the offset
4677 from the target's @file{jmpbuf.h}, that header file cannot be assumed
4678 to be available when building a cross-debugger.)
4679
4680 @item DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
4681 @findex DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
4682 Shows that we are configured for an IBM RS/6000 system. This
4683 conditional should be eliminated (FIXME) and replaced by
4684 feature-specific macros. It was introduced in haste and we are
4685 repenting at leisure.
4686
4687 @item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
4688 An x86-based target can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
4689 support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
4690
4691 @item gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
4692 @findex gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p
4693 Returns non-zero if the given @var{addr} is in the epilogue of a function.
4694 The epilogue of a function is defined as the part of a function where
4695 the stack frame of the function already has been destroyed up to the
4696 final `return from function call' instruction.
4697
4698 @item int gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{name})
4699 @findex gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline
4700 Define this function to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
4701 trampoline that returns from a shared library.
4702
4703 @item target_so_ops.in_dynsym_resolve_code (@var{pc})
4704 @findex in_dynsym_resolve_code
4705 Define this to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
4706 dynamic linker.
4707
4708 @item SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER (@var{pc})
4709 @findex SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER
4710 Define this to evaluate to the (nonzero) address at which execution
4711 should continue to get past the dynamic linker's symbol resolution
4712 function. A zero value indicates that it is not important or necessary
4713 to set a breakpoint to get through the dynamic linker and that single
4714 stepping will suffice.
4715
4716 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_integer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4717 @findex gdbarch_integer_to_address
4718 @cindex converting integers to addresses
4719 Define this when the architecture needs to handle non-pointer to address
4720 conversions specially. Converts that value to an address according to
4721 the current architectures conventions.
4722
4723 @emph{Pragmatics: When the user copies a well defined expression from
4724 their source code and passes it, as a parameter, to @value{GDBN}'s
4725 @code{print} command, they should get the same value as would have been
4726 computed by the target program. Any deviation from this rule can cause
4727 major confusion and annoyance, and needs to be justified carefully. In
4728 other words, @value{GDBN} doesn't really have the freedom to do these
4729 conversions in clever and useful ways. It has, however, been pointed
4730 out that users aren't complaining about how @value{GDBN} casts integers
4731 to pointers; they are complaining that they can't take an address from a
4732 disassembly listing and give it to @code{x/i}. Adding an architecture
4733 method like @code{gdbarch_integer_to_address} certainly makes it possible for
4734 @value{GDBN} to ``get it right'' in all circumstances.}
4735
4736 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always
4737 Addresses}.
4738
4739 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4740 @findex gdbarch_pointer_to_address
4741 Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
4742 appropriate format for the current architecture. Return the byte
4743 address the pointer refers to.
4744 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
4745
4746 @item void gdbarch_register_to_value(@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{type}, @var{fur})
4747 @findex gdbarch_register_to_value
4748 Convert the raw contents of register @var{regnum} into a value of type
4749 @var{type}.
4750 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4751
4752 @item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL(@var{reg}, @var{type}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4753 @findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL
4754 Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its raw form to its virtual
4755 form.
4756 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
4757
4758 @item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW(@var{type}, @var{reg}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4759 @findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW
4760 Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its virtual form to its raw
4761 form.
4762 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
4763
4764 @item const struct regset *regset_from_core_section (struct gdbarch * @var{gdbarch}, const char * @var{sect_name}, size_t @var{sect_size})
4765 @findex regset_from_core_section
4766 Return the appropriate register set for a core file section with name
4767 @var{sect_name} and size @var{sect_size}.
4768
4769 @item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P()
4770 @findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P
4771 Define this as 1 if the target does not have a hardware single-step
4772 mechanism. The macro @code{SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP} must also be defined.
4773
4774 @item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP(@var{signal}, @var{insert_breakpoints_p})
4775 @findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP
4776 A function that inserts or removes (depending on
4777 @var{insert_breakpoints_p}) breakpoints at each possible destinations of
4778 the next instruction. See @file{sparc-tdep.c} and @file{rs6000-tdep.c}
4779 for examples.
4780
4781 @item set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing (@var{gdbarch}, @var{set})
4782 @findex set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing
4783 Somebody clever observed that, the more actual addresses you have in the
4784 debug information, the more time the linker has to spend relocating
4785 them. So whenever there's some other way the debugger could find the
4786 address it needs, you should omit it from the debug info, to make
4787 linking faster.
4788
4789 Calling @code{set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing} with a non-zero
4790 argument @var{set} indicates that a particular set of hacks of this sort
4791 are in use, affecting @code{N_SO} and @code{N_FUN} entries in stabs-format
4792 debugging information. @code{N_SO} stabs mark the beginning and ending
4793 addresses of compilation units in the text segment. @code{N_FUN} stabs
4794 mark the starts and ends of functions.
4795
4796 In this case, @value{GDBN} assumes two things:
4797
4798 @itemize @bullet
4799 @item
4800 @code{N_FUN} stabs have an address of zero. Instead of using those
4801 addresses, you should find the address where the function starts by
4802 taking the function name from the stab, and then looking that up in the
4803 minsyms (the linker/assembler symbol table). In other words, the stab
4804 has the name, and the linker/assembler symbol table is the only place
4805 that carries the address.
4806
4807 @item
4808 @code{N_SO} stabs have an address of zero, too. You just look at the
4809 @code{N_FUN} stabs that appear before and after the @code{N_SO} stab, and
4810 guess the starting and ending addresses of the compilation unit from them.
4811 @end itemize
4812
4813 @item int gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type})
4814 @findex gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr
4815 @anchor{gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr} Define this function to return
4816 nonzero if a function argument of type @var{type} is passed by reference
4817 instead of value.
4818
4819 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_call (@var{gdbarch}, @var{function}, @var{regcache}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{nargs}, @var{args}, @var{sp}, @var{struct_return}, @var{struct_addr})
4820 @findex gdbarch_push_dummy_call
4821 @anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_call} Define this to push the dummy frame's call to
4822 the inferior function onto the stack. In addition to pushing @var{nargs}, the
4823 code should push @var{struct_addr} (when @var{struct_return} is non-zero), and
4824 the return address (@var{bp_addr}).
4825
4826 @var{function} is a pointer to a @code{struct value}; on architectures that use
4827 function descriptors, this contains the function descriptor value.
4828
4829 Returns the updated top-of-stack pointer.
4830
4831 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sp}, @var{funaddr}, @var{using_gcc}, @var{args}, @var{nargs}, @var{value_type}, @var{real_pc}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{regcache})
4832 @findex gdbarch_push_dummy_code
4833 @anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_code} Given a stack based call dummy, push the
4834 instruction sequence (including space for a breakpoint) to which the
4835 called function should return.
4836
4837 Set @var{bp_addr} to the address at which the breakpoint instruction
4838 should be inserted, @var{real_pc} to the resume address when starting
4839 the call sequence, and return the updated inner-most stack address.
4840
4841 By default, the stack is grown sufficient to hold a frame-aligned
4842 (@pxref{frame_align}) breakpoint, @var{bp_addr} is set to the address
4843 reserved for that breakpoint, and @var{real_pc} set to @var{funaddr}.
4844
4845 This method replaces @w{@code{gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4846
4847 @item int gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sdb_regnr})
4848 @findex gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum
4849 Use this function to convert sdb register @var{sdb_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4850 regnum. If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4851
4852 @item enum return_value_convention gdbarch_return_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{valtype}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, void *@var{readbuf}, const void *@var{writebuf})
4853 @findex gdbarch_return_value
4854 @anchor{gdbarch_return_value} Given a function with a return-value of
4855 type @var{rettype}, return which return-value convention that function
4856 would use.
4857
4858 @value{GDBN} currently recognizes two function return-value conventions:
4859 @code{RETURN_VALUE_REGISTER_CONVENTION} where the return value is found
4860 in registers; and @code{RETURN_VALUE_STRUCT_CONVENTION} where the return
4861 value is found in memory and the address of that memory location is
4862 passed in as the function's first parameter.
4863
4864 If the register convention is being used, and @var{writebuf} is
4865 non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return-value in @var{writebuf} into
4866 @var{regcache}.
4867
4868 If the register convention is being used, and @var{readbuf} is
4869 non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return value from @var{regcache} into
4870 @var{readbuf} (@var{regcache} contains a copy of the registers from the
4871 just returned function).
4872
4873 @emph{Maintainer note: This method replaces separate predicate, extract,
4874 store methods. By having only one method, the logic needed to determine
4875 the return-value convention need only be implemented in one place. If
4876 @value{GDBN} were written in an @sc{oo} language, this method would
4877 instead return an object that knew how to perform the register
4878 return-value extract and store.}
4879
4880 @emph{Maintainer note: This method does not take a @var{gcc_p}
4881 parameter, and such a parameter should not be added. If an architecture
4882 that requires per-compiler or per-function information be identified,
4883 then the replacement of @var{rettype} with @code{struct value}
4884 @var{function} should be pursued.}
4885
4886 @emph{Maintainer note: The @var{regcache} parameter limits this methods
4887 to the inner most frame. While replacing @var{regcache} with a
4888 @code{struct frame_info} @var{frame} parameter would remove that
4889 limitation there has yet to be a demonstrated need for such a change.}
4890
4891 @item void gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache})
4892 @findex gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint
4893 Advance the inferior's PC past a permanent breakpoint. @value{GDBN} normally
4894 steps over a breakpoint by removing it, stepping one instruction, and
4895 re-inserting the breakpoint. However, permanent breakpoints are
4896 hardwired into the inferior, and can't be removed, so this strategy
4897 doesn't work. Calling @code{gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint} adjusts the
4898 processor's state so that execution will resume just after the breakpoint.
4899 This function does the right thing even when the breakpoint is in the delay slot
4900 of a branch or jump.
4901
4902 @item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{pc})
4903 @findex gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code
4904 If the target machine has trampoline code that sits between callers and
4905 the functions being called, then define this function to return a new PC
4906 that is at the start of the real function.
4907
4908 @item int gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4909 @findex gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum
4910 If the frame pointer is in a register, use this function to return the
4911 number of that register.
4912
4913 @item int gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{stab_regnr})
4914 @findex gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum
4915 Use this function to convert stab register @var{stab_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4916 regnum. If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4917
4918 @item TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4919 @findex TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4920 Number of bits in a char; defaults to 8.
4921
4922 @item int gdbarch_char_signed (@var{gdbarch})
4923 @findex gdbarch_char_signed
4924 Non-zero if @code{char} is normally signed on this architecture; zero if
4925 it should be unsigned.
4926
4927 The ISO C standard requires the compiler to treat @code{char} as
4928 equivalent to either @code{signed char} or @code{unsigned char}; any
4929 character in the standard execution set is supposed to be positive.
4930 Most compilers treat @code{char} as signed, but @code{char} is unsigned
4931 on the IBM S/390, RS6000, and PowerPC targets.
4932
4933 @item int gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4934 @findex gdbarch_double_bit
4935 Number of bits in a double float; defaults to @w{@code{8 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4936
4937 @item int gdbarch_float_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4938 @findex gdbarch_float_bit
4939 Number of bits in a float; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4940
4941 @item int gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4942 @findex gdbarch_int_bit
4943 Number of bits in an integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4944
4945 @item int gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4946 @findex gdbarch_long_bit
4947 Number of bits in a long integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4948
4949 @item int gdbarch_long_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4950 @findex gdbarch_long_double_bit
4951 Number of bits in a long double float;
4952 defaults to @w{@code{2 * gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4953
4954 @item int gdbarch_long_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4955 @findex gdbarch_long_long_bit
4956 Number of bits in a long long integer; defaults to
4957 @w{@code{2 * gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4958
4959 @item int gdbarch_ptr_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4960 @findex gdbarch_ptr_bit
4961 Number of bits in a pointer; defaults to
4962 @w{@code{gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4963
4964 @item int gdbarch_short_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4965 @findex gdbarch_short_bit
4966 Number of bits in a short integer; defaults to @w{@code{2 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4967
4968 @item void gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{frame_regnum}, @var{frame_offset})
4969 @findex gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer
4970 Returns a @code{(@var{register}, @var{offset})} pair representing the virtual
4971 frame pointer in use at the code address @var{pc}. If virtual frame
4972 pointers are not used, a default definition simply returns
4973 @code{gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum} (or @code{gdbarch_sp_regnum}, if
4974 no frame pointer is defined), with an offset of zero.
4975
4976 @c need to explain virtual frame pointers, they are recorded in agent
4977 @c expressions for tracepoints
4978
4979 @item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
4980 If non-zero, the target has support for hardware-assisted
4981 watchpoints. @xref{Algorithms, watchpoints}, for more details and
4982 other related macros.
4983
4984 @item int gdbarch_print_insn (@var{gdbarch}, @var{vma}, @var{info})
4985 @findex gdbarch_print_insn
4986 This is the function used by @value{GDBN} to print an assembly
4987 instruction. It prints the instruction at address @var{vma} in
4988 debugged memory and returns the length of the instruction, in bytes.
4989 This usually points to a function in the @code{opcodes} library
4990 (@pxref{Support Libraries, ,Opcodes}). @var{info} is a structure (of
4991 type @code{disassemble_info}) defined in the header file
4992 @file{include/dis-asm.h}, and used to pass information to the
4993 instruction decoding routine.
4994
4995 @item frame_id gdbarch_dummy_id (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame})
4996 @findex gdbarch_dummy_id
4997 @anchor{gdbarch_dummy_id} Given @var{frame} return a @w{@code{struct
4998 frame_id}} that uniquely identifies an inferior function call's dummy
4999 frame. The value returned must match the dummy frame stack value
5000 previously saved by @code{call_function_by_hand}.
5001
5002 @item void gdbarch_value_to_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
5003 @findex gdbarch_value_to_register
5004 Convert a value of type @var{type} into the raw contents of a register.
5005 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
5006
5007 @end table
5008
5009 Motorola M68K target conditionals.
5010
5011 @ftable @code
5012 @item BPT_VECTOR
5013 Define this to be the 4-bit location of the breakpoint trap vector. If
5014 not defined, it will default to @code{0xf}.
5015
5016 @item REMOTE_BPT_VECTOR
5017 Defaults to @code{1}.
5018
5019 @end ftable
5020
5021 @node Adding a New Target
5022 @section Adding a New Target
5023
5024 @cindex adding a target
5025 The following files add a target to @value{GDBN}:
5026
5027 @table @file
5028 @cindex target dependent files
5029
5030 @item gdb/@var{ttt}-tdep.c
5031 Contains any miscellaneous code required for this target machine. On
5032 some machines it doesn't exist at all.
5033
5034 @item gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.c
5035 @itemx gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.h
5036 This is required to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
5037 processor chip (registers, stack, etc.). It can be shared among many
5038 targets that use the same processor architecture.
5039
5040 @end table
5041
5042 (Target header files such as
5043 @file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{ttt}.h},
5044 @file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{arch}.h}, and
5045 @file{config/tm-@var{os}.h} are no longer used.)
5046
5047 @findex _initialize_@var{arch}_tdep
5048 A @value{GDBN} description for a new architecture, arch is created by
5049 defining a global function @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep}, by
5050 convention in the source file @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}. For
5051 example, in the case of the OpenRISC 1000, this function is called
5052 @code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} and is found in the file
5053 @file{or1k-tdep.c}.
5054
5055 The object file resulting from compiling this source file, which will
5056 contain the implementation of the
5057 @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function is specified in the
5058 @value{GDBN} @file{configure.tgt} file, which includes a large case
5059 statement pattern matching against the @code{--target} option of the
5060 @kbd{configure} script.
5061
5062 @quotation
5063 @emph{Note:} If the architecture requires multiple source files, the
5064 corresponding binaries should be included in
5065 @file{configure.tgt}. However if there are header files, the
5066 dependencies on these will not be picked up from the entries in
5067 @file{configure.tgt}. The @file{Makefile.in} file will need extending to
5068 show these dependencies.
5069 @end quotation
5070
5071 @findex gdbarch_register
5072 A new struct gdbarch, defining the new architecture, is created within
5073 the @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function by calling
5074 @code{gdbarch_register}:
5075
5076 @smallexample
5077 void gdbarch_register (enum bfd_architecture architecture,
5078 gdbarch_init_ftype *init_func,
5079 gdbarch_dump_tdep_ftype *tdep_dump_func);
5080 @end smallexample
5081
5082 This function has been described fully in an earlier
5083 section. @xref{How an Architecture is Represented, , How an
5084 Architecture is Represented}.
5085
5086 The new @code{@w{struct gdbarch}} should contain implementations of
5087 the necessary functions (described in the previous sections) to
5088 describe the basic layout of the target machine's processor chip
5089 (registers, stack, etc.). It can be shared among many targets that use
5090 the same processor architecture.
5091
5092 @node Target Descriptions
5093 @chapter Target Descriptions
5094 @cindex target descriptions
5095
5096 The target architecture definition (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition})
5097 contains @value{GDBN}'s hard-coded knowledge about an architecture. For
5098 some platforms, it is handy to have more flexible knowledge about a specific
5099 instance of the architecture---for instance, a processor or development board.
5100 @dfn{Target descriptions} provide a mechanism for the user to tell @value{GDBN}
5101 more about what their target supports, or for the target to tell @value{GDBN}
5102 directly.
5103
5104 For details on writing, automatically supplying, and manually selecting
5105 target descriptions, see @ref{Target Descriptions, , , gdb,
5106 Debugging with @value{GDBN}}. This section will cover some related
5107 topics about the @value{GDBN} internals.
5108
5109 @menu
5110 * Target Descriptions Implementation::
5111 * Adding Target Described Register Support::
5112 @end menu
5113
5114 @node Target Descriptions Implementation
5115 @section Target Descriptions Implementation
5116 @cindex target descriptions, implementation
5117
5118 Before @value{GDBN} connects to a new target, or runs a new program on
5119 an existing target, it discards any existing target description and
5120 reverts to a default gdbarch. Then, after connecting, it looks for a
5121 new target description by calling @code{target_find_description}.
5122
5123 A description may come from a user specified file (XML), the remote
5124 @samp{qXfer:features:read} packet (also XML), or from any custom
5125 @code{to_read_description} routine in the target vector. For instance,
5126 the remote target supports guessing whether a MIPS target is 32-bit or
5127 64-bit based on the size of the @samp{g} packet.
5128
5129 If any target description is found, @value{GDBN} creates a new gdbarch
5130 incorporating the description by calling @code{gdbarch_update_p}. Any
5131 @samp{<architecture>} element is handled first, to determine which
5132 architecture's gdbarch initialization routine is called to create the
5133 new architecture. Then the initialization routine is called, and has
5134 a chance to adjust the constructed architecture based on the contents
5135 of the target description. For instance, it can recognize any
5136 properties set by a @code{to_read_description} routine. Also
5137 see @ref{Adding Target Described Register Support}.
5138
5139 @node Adding Target Described Register Support
5140 @section Adding Target Described Register Support
5141 @cindex target descriptions, adding register support
5142
5143 Target descriptions can report additional registers specific to an
5144 instance of the target. But it takes a little work in the architecture
5145 specific routines to support this.
5146
5147 A target description must either have no registers or a complete
5148 set---this avoids complexity in trying to merge standard registers
5149 with the target defined registers. It is the architecture's
5150 responsibility to validate that a description with registers has
5151 everything it needs. To keep architecture code simple, the same
5152 mechanism is used to assign fixed internal register numbers to
5153 standard registers.
5154
5155 If @code{tdesc_has_registers} returns 1, the description contains
5156 registers. The architecture's @code{gdbarch_init} routine should:
5157
5158 @itemize @bullet
5159
5160 @item
5161 Call @code{tdesc_data_alloc} to allocate storage, early, before
5162 searching for a matching gdbarch or allocating a new one.
5163
5164 @item
5165 Use @code{tdesc_find_feature} to locate standard features by name.
5166
5167 @item
5168 Use @code{tdesc_numbered_register} and @code{tdesc_numbered_register_choices}
5169 to locate the expected registers in the standard features.
5170
5171 @item
5172 Return @code{NULL} if a required feature is missing, or if any standard
5173 feature is missing expected registers. This will produce a warning that
5174 the description was incomplete.
5175
5176 @item
5177 Free the allocated data before returning, unless @code{tdesc_use_registers}
5178 is called.
5179
5180 @item
5181 Call @code{set_gdbarch_num_regs} as usual, with a number higher than any
5182 fixed number passed to @code{tdesc_numbered_register}.
5183
5184 @item
5185 Call @code{tdesc_use_registers} after creating a new gdbarch, before
5186 returning it.
5187
5188 @end itemize
5189
5190 After @code{tdesc_use_registers} has been called, the architecture's
5191 @code{register_name}, @code{register_type}, and @code{register_reggroup_p}
5192 routines will not be called; that information will be taken from
5193 the target description. @code{num_regs} may be increased to account
5194 for any additional registers in the description.
5195
5196 Pseudo-registers require some extra care:
5197
5198 @itemize @bullet
5199
5200 @item
5201 Using @code{tdesc_numbered_register} allows the architecture to give
5202 constant register numbers to standard architectural registers, e.g.@:
5203 as an @code{enum} in @file{@var{arch}-tdep.h}. But because
5204 pseudo-registers are always numbered above @code{num_regs},
5205 which may be increased by the description, constant numbers
5206 can not be used for pseudos. They must be numbered relative to
5207 @code{num_regs} instead.
5208
5209 @item
5210 The description will not describe pseudo-registers, so the
5211 architecture must call @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_name},
5212 @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_type}, and
5213 @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_reggroup_p} to supply routines
5214 describing pseudo registers. These routines will be passed
5215 internal register numbers, so the same routines used for the
5216 gdbarch equivalents are usually suitable.
5217
5218 @end itemize
5219
5220
5221 @node Target Vector Definition
5222
5223 @chapter Target Vector Definition
5224 @cindex target vector
5225
5226 The target vector defines the interface between @value{GDBN}'s
5227 abstract handling of target systems, and the nitty-gritty code that
5228 actually exercises control over a process or a serial port.
5229 @value{GDBN} includes some 30-40 different target vectors; however,
5230 each configuration of @value{GDBN} includes only a few of them.
5231
5232 @menu
5233 * Managing Execution State::
5234 * Existing Targets::
5235 @end menu
5236
5237 @node Managing Execution State
5238 @section Managing Execution State
5239 @cindex execution state
5240
5241 A target vector can be completely inactive (not pushed on the target
5242 stack), active but not running (pushed, but not connected to a fully
5243 manifested inferior), or completely active (pushed, with an accessible
5244 inferior). Most targets are only completely inactive or completely
5245 active, but some support persistent connections to a target even
5246 when the target has exited or not yet started.
5247
5248 For example, connecting to the simulator using @code{target sim} does
5249 not create a running program. Neither registers nor memory are
5250 accessible until @code{run}. Similarly, after @code{kill}, the
5251 program can not continue executing. But in both cases @value{GDBN}
5252 remains connected to the simulator, and target-specific commands
5253 are directed to the simulator.
5254
5255 A target which only supports complete activation should push itself
5256 onto the stack in its @code{to_open} routine (by calling
5257 @code{push_target}), and unpush itself from the stack in its
5258 @code{to_mourn_inferior} routine (by calling @code{unpush_target}).
5259
5260 A target which supports both partial and complete activation should
5261 still call @code{push_target} in @code{to_open}, but not call
5262 @code{unpush_target} in @code{to_mourn_inferior}. Instead, it should
5263 call either @code{target_mark_running} or @code{target_mark_exited}
5264 in its @code{to_open}, depending on whether the target is fully active
5265 after connection. It should also call @code{target_mark_running} any
5266 time the inferior becomes fully active (e.g.@: in
5267 @code{to_create_inferior} and @code{to_attach}), and
5268 @code{target_mark_exited} when the inferior becomes inactive (in
5269 @code{to_mourn_inferior}). The target should also make sure to call
5270 @code{target_mourn_inferior} from its @code{to_kill}, to return the
5271 target to inactive state.
5272
5273 @node Existing Targets
5274 @section Existing Targets
5275 @cindex targets
5276
5277 @subsection File Targets
5278
5279 Both executables and core files have target vectors.
5280
5281 @subsection Standard Protocol and Remote Stubs
5282
5283 @value{GDBN}'s file @file{remote.c} talks a serial protocol to code that
5284 runs in the target system. @value{GDBN} provides several sample
5285 @dfn{stubs} that can be integrated into target programs or operating
5286 systems for this purpose; they are named @file{@var{cpu}-stub.c}. Many
5287 operating systems, embedded targets, emulators, and simulators already
5288 have a @value{GDBN} stub built into them, and maintenance of the remote
5289 protocol must be careful to preserve compatibility.
5290
5291 The @value{GDBN} user's manual describes how to put such a stub into
5292 your target code. What follows is a discussion of integrating the
5293 SPARC stub into a complicated operating system (rather than a simple
5294 program), by Stu Grossman, the author of this stub.
5295
5296 The trap handling code in the stub assumes the following upon entry to
5297 @code{trap_low}:
5298
5299 @enumerate
5300 @item
5301 %l1 and %l2 contain pc and npc respectively at the time of the trap;
5302
5303 @item
5304 traps are disabled;
5305
5306 @item
5307 you are in the correct trap window.
5308 @end enumerate
5309
5310 As long as your trap handler can guarantee those conditions, then there
5311 is no reason why you shouldn't be able to ``share'' traps with the stub.
5312 The stub has no requirement that it be jumped to directly from the
5313 hardware trap vector. That is why it calls @code{exceptionHandler()},
5314 which is provided by the external environment. For instance, this could
5315 set up the hardware traps to actually execute code which calls the stub
5316 first, and then transfers to its own trap handler.
5317
5318 For the most point, there probably won't be much of an issue with
5319 ``sharing'' traps, as the traps we use are usually not used by the kernel,
5320 and often indicate unrecoverable error conditions. Anyway, this is all
5321 controlled by a table, and is trivial to modify. The most important
5322 trap for us is for @code{ta 1}. Without that, we can't single step or
5323 do breakpoints. Everything else is unnecessary for the proper operation
5324 of the debugger/stub.
5325
5326 From reading the stub, it's probably not obvious how breakpoints work.
5327 They are simply done by deposit/examine operations from @value{GDBN}.
5328
5329 @subsection ROM Monitor Interface
5330
5331 @subsection Custom Protocols
5332
5333 @subsection Transport Layer
5334
5335 @subsection Builtin Simulator
5336
5337
5338 @node Native Debugging
5339
5340 @chapter Native Debugging
5341 @cindex native debugging
5342
5343 Several files control @value{GDBN}'s configuration for native support:
5344
5345 @table @file
5346 @vindex NATDEPFILES
5347 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
5348 Specifies Makefile fragments needed by a @emph{native} configuration on
5349 machine @var{xyz}. In particular, this lists the required
5350 native-dependent object files, by defining @samp{NATDEPFILES=@dots{}}.
5351 Also specifies the header file which describes native support on
5352 @var{xyz}, by defining @samp{NAT_FILE= nm-@var{xyz}.h}. You can also
5353 define @samp{NAT_CFLAGS}, @samp{NAT_ADD_FILES}, @samp{NAT_CLIBS},
5354 @samp{NAT_CDEPS}, @samp{NAT_GENERATED_FILES}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
5355
5356 @emph{Maintainer's note: The @file{.mh} suffix is because this file
5357 originally contained @file{Makefile} fragments for hosting @value{GDBN}
5358 on machine @var{xyz}. While the file is no longer used for this
5359 purpose, the @file{.mh} suffix remains. Perhaps someone will
5360 eventually rename these fragments so that they have a @file{.mn}
5361 suffix.}
5362
5363 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/nm-@var{xyz}.h
5364 (@file{nm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}). Contains C
5365 macro definitions describing the native system environment, such as
5366 child process control and core file support.
5367
5368 @item gdb/@var{xyz}-nat.c
5369 Contains any miscellaneous C code required for this native support of
5370 this machine. On some machines it doesn't exist at all.
5371 @end table
5372
5373 There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
5374 various systems. These can be customized in various ways by macros
5375 defined in your @file{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file. If these routines work for
5376 the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
5377 @samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{NATDEPFILES}.
5378
5379 Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
5380 to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
5381 Put them into @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c}, and put @file{@var{xyz}-nat.o}
5382 into @code{NATDEPFILES}.
5383
5384 @table @file
5385 @item inftarg.c
5386 This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
5387 processes on systems which use ptrace and wait to control the child.
5388
5389 @item procfs.c
5390 This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
5391 processes on systems which use /proc to control the child.
5392
5393 @item fork-child.c
5394 This does the low-level grunge that uses Unix system calls to do a ``fork
5395 and exec'' to start up a child process.
5396
5397 @item infptrace.c
5398 This is the low level interface to inferior processes for systems using
5399 the Unix @code{ptrace} call in a vanilla way.
5400 @end table
5401
5402 @section ptrace
5403
5404 @section /proc
5405
5406 @section win32
5407
5408 @section shared libraries
5409
5410 @section Native Conditionals
5411 @cindex native conditionals
5412
5413 When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
5414 defined or left undefined, to control compilation when the host and
5415 target systems are the same. These macros should be defined (or left
5416 undefined) in @file{nm-@var{system}.h}.
5417
5418 @table @code
5419
5420 @item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
5421 An x86-based machine can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
5422 support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
5423
5424 @item SOLIB_ADD (@var{filename}, @var{from_tty}, @var{targ}, @var{readsyms})
5425 @findex SOLIB_ADD
5426 Define this to expand into an expression that will cause the symbols in
5427 @var{filename} to be added to @value{GDBN}'s symbol table. If
5428 @var{readsyms} is zero symbols are not read but any necessary low level
5429 processing for @var{filename} is still done.
5430
5431 @item SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
5432 @findex SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
5433 Define this to expand into any shared-library-relocation code that you
5434 want to be run just after the child process has been forked.
5435
5436 @item START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
5437 @findex START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
5438 When starting an inferior, @value{GDBN} normally expects to trap
5439 twice; once when
5440 the shell execs, and once when the program itself execs. If the actual
5441 number of traps is something other than 2, then define this macro to
5442 expand into the number expected.
5443
5444 @end table
5445
5446 @node Support Libraries
5447
5448 @chapter Support Libraries
5449
5450 @section BFD
5451 @cindex BFD library
5452
5453 BFD provides support for @value{GDBN} in several ways:
5454
5455 @table @emph
5456 @item identifying executable and core files
5457 BFD will identify a variety of file types, including a.out, coff, and
5458 several variants thereof, as well as several kinds of core files.
5459
5460 @item access to sections of files
5461 BFD parses the file headers to determine the names, virtual addresses,
5462 sizes, and file locations of all the various named sections in files
5463 (such as the text section or the data section). @value{GDBN} simply
5464 calls BFD to read or write section @var{x} at byte offset @var{y} for
5465 length @var{z}.
5466
5467 @item specialized core file support
5468 BFD provides routines to determine the failing command name stored in a
5469 core file, the signal with which the program failed, and whether a core
5470 file matches (i.e.@: could be a core dump of) a particular executable
5471 file.
5472
5473 @item locating the symbol information
5474 @value{GDBN} uses an internal interface of BFD to determine where to find the
5475 symbol information in an executable file or symbol-file. @value{GDBN} itself
5476 handles the reading of symbols, since BFD does not ``understand'' debug
5477 symbols, but @value{GDBN} uses BFD's cached information to find the symbols,
5478 string table, etc.
5479 @end table
5480
5481 @section opcodes
5482 @cindex opcodes library
5483
5484 The opcodes library provides @value{GDBN}'s disassembler. (It's a separate
5485 library because it's also used in binutils, for @file{objdump}).
5486
5487 @section readline
5488 @cindex readline library
5489 The @code{readline} library provides a set of functions for use by applications
5490 that allow users to edit command lines as they are typed in.
5491
5492 @section libiberty
5493 @cindex @code{libiberty} library
5494
5495 The @code{libiberty} library provides a set of functions and features
5496 that integrate and improve on functionality found in modern operating
5497 systems. Broadly speaking, such features can be divided into three
5498 groups: supplemental functions (functions that may be missing in some
5499 environments and operating systems), replacement functions (providing
5500 a uniform and easier to use interface for commonly used standard
5501 functions), and extensions (which provide additional functionality
5502 beyond standard functions).
5503
5504 @value{GDBN} uses various features provided by the @code{libiberty}
5505 library, for instance the C@t{++} demangler, the @acronym{IEEE}
5506 floating format support functions, the input options parser
5507 @samp{getopt}, the @samp{obstack} extension, and other functions.
5508
5509 @subsection @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN}
5510 @cindex @code{obstacks}
5511
5512 The obstack mechanism provides a convenient way to allocate and free
5513 chunks of memory. Each obstack is a pool of memory that is managed
5514 like a stack. Objects (of any nature, size and alignment) are
5515 allocated and freed in a @acronym{LIFO} fashion on an obstack (see
5516 @code{libiberty}'s documentation for a more detailed explanation of
5517 @code{obstacks}).
5518
5519 The most noticeable use of the @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN} is in
5520 object files. There is an obstack associated with each internal
5521 representation of an object file. Lots of things get allocated on
5522 these @code{obstacks}: dictionary entries, blocks, blockvectors,
5523 symbols, minimal symbols, types, vectors of fundamental types, class
5524 fields of types, object files section lists, object files section
5525 offset lists, line tables, symbol tables, partial symbol tables,
5526 string tables, symbol table private data, macros tables, debug
5527 information sections and entries, import and export lists (som),
5528 unwind information (hppa), dwarf2 location expressions data. Plus
5529 various strings such as directory names strings, debug format strings,
5530 names of types.
5531
5532 An essential and convenient property of all data on @code{obstacks} is
5533 that memory for it gets allocated (with @code{obstack_alloc}) at
5534 various times during a debugging session, but it is released all at
5535 once using the @code{obstack_free} function. The @code{obstack_free}
5536 function takes a pointer to where in the stack it must start the
5537 deletion from (much like the cleanup chains have a pointer to where to
5538 start the cleanups). Because of the stack like structure of the
5539 @code{obstacks}, this allows to free only a top portion of the
5540 obstack. There are a few instances in @value{GDBN} where such thing
5541 happens. Calls to @code{obstack_free} are done after some local data
5542 is allocated to the obstack. Only the local data is deleted from the
5543 obstack. Of course this assumes that nothing between the
5544 @code{obstack_alloc} and the @code{obstack_free} allocates anything
5545 else on the same obstack. For this reason it is best and safest to
5546 use temporary @code{obstacks}.
5547
5548 Releasing the whole obstack is also not safe per se. It is safe only
5549 under the condition that we know the @code{obstacks} memory is no
5550 longer needed. In @value{GDBN} we get rid of the @code{obstacks} only
5551 when we get rid of the whole objfile(s), for instance upon reading a
5552 new symbol file.
5553
5554 @section gnu-regex
5555 @cindex regular expressions library
5556
5557 Regex conditionals.
5558
5559 @table @code
5560 @item C_ALLOCA
5561
5562 @item NFAILURES
5563
5564 @item RE_NREGS
5565
5566 @item SIGN_EXTEND_CHAR
5567
5568 @item SWITCH_ENUM_BUG
5569
5570 @item SYNTAX_TABLE
5571
5572 @item Sword
5573
5574 @item sparc
5575 @end table
5576
5577 @section Array Containers
5578 @cindex Array Containers
5579 @cindex VEC
5580
5581 Often it is necessary to manipulate a dynamic array of a set of
5582 objects. C forces some bookkeeping on this, which can get cumbersome
5583 and repetitive. The @file{vec.h} file contains macros for defining
5584 and using a typesafe vector type. The functions defined will be
5585 inlined when compiling, and so the abstraction cost should be zero.
5586 Domain checks are added to detect programming errors.
5587
5588 An example use would be an array of symbols or section information.
5589 The array can be grown as symbols are read in (or preallocated), and
5590 the accessor macros provided keep care of all the necessary
5591 bookkeeping. Because the arrays are type safe, there is no danger of
5592 accidentally mixing up the contents. Think of these as C++ templates,
5593 but implemented in C.
5594
5595 Because of the different behavior of structure objects, scalar objects
5596 and of pointers, there are three flavors of vector, one for each of
5597 these variants. Both the structure object and pointer variants pass
5598 pointers to objects around --- in the former case the pointers are
5599 stored into the vector and in the latter case the pointers are
5600 dereferenced and the objects copied into the vector. The scalar
5601 object variant is suitable for @code{int}-like objects, and the vector
5602 elements are returned by value.
5603
5604 There are both @code{index} and @code{iterate} accessors. The iterator
5605 returns a boolean iteration condition and updates the iteration
5606 variable passed by reference. Because the iterator will be inlined,
5607 the address-of can be optimized away.
5608
5609 The vectors are implemented using the trailing array idiom, thus they
5610 are not resizeable without changing the address of the vector object
5611 itself. This means you cannot have variables or fields of vector type
5612 --- always use a pointer to a vector. The one exception is the final
5613 field of a structure, which could be a vector type. You will have to
5614 use the @code{embedded_size} & @code{embedded_init} calls to create
5615 such objects, and they will probably not be resizeable (so don't use
5616 the @dfn{safe} allocation variants). The trailing array idiom is used
5617 (rather than a pointer to an array of data), because, if we allow
5618 @code{NULL} to also represent an empty vector, empty vectors occupy
5619 minimal space in the structure containing them.
5620
5621 Each operation that increases the number of active elements is
5622 available in @dfn{quick} and @dfn{safe} variants. The former presumes
5623 that there is sufficient allocated space for the operation to succeed
5624 (it dies if there is not). The latter will reallocate the vector, if
5625 needed. Reallocation causes an exponential increase in vector size.
5626 If you know you will be adding N elements, it would be more efficient
5627 to use the reserve operation before adding the elements with the
5628 @dfn{quick} operation. This will ensure there are at least as many
5629 elements as you ask for, it will exponentially increase if there are
5630 too few spare slots. If you want reserve a specific number of slots,
5631 but do not want the exponential increase (for instance, you know this
5632 is the last allocation), use a negative number for reservation. You
5633 can also create a vector of a specific size from the get go.
5634
5635 You should prefer the push and pop operations, as they append and
5636 remove from the end of the vector. If you need to remove several items
5637 in one go, use the truncate operation. The insert and remove
5638 operations allow you to change elements in the middle of the vector.
5639 There are two remove operations, one which preserves the element
5640 ordering @code{ordered_remove}, and one which does not
5641 @code{unordered_remove}. The latter function copies the end element
5642 into the removed slot, rather than invoke a memmove operation. The
5643 @code{lower_bound} function will determine where to place an item in
5644 the array using insert that will maintain sorted order.
5645
5646 If you need to directly manipulate a vector, then the @code{address}
5647 accessor will return the address of the start of the vector. Also the
5648 @code{space} predicate will tell you whether there is spare capacity in the
5649 vector. You will not normally need to use these two functions.
5650
5651 Vector types are defined using a
5652 @code{DEF_VEC_@{O,P,I@}(@var{typename})} macro. Variables of vector
5653 type are declared using a @code{VEC(@var{typename})} macro. The
5654 characters @code{O}, @code{P} and @code{I} indicate whether
5655 @var{typename} is an object (@code{O}), pointer (@code{P}) or integral
5656 (@code{I}) type. Be careful to pick the correct one, as you'll get an
5657 awkward and inefficient API if you use the wrong one. There is a
5658 check, which results in a compile-time warning, for the @code{P} and
5659 @code{I} versions, but there is no check for the @code{O} versions, as
5660 that is not possible in plain C.
5661
5662 An example of their use would be,
5663
5664 @smallexample
5665 DEF_VEC_P(tree); // non-managed tree vector.
5666
5667 struct my_struct @{
5668 VEC(tree) *v; // A (pointer to) a vector of tree pointers.
5669 @};
5670
5671 struct my_struct *s;
5672
5673 if (VEC_length(tree, s->v)) @{ we have some contents @}
5674 VEC_safe_push(tree, s->v, decl); // append some decl onto the end
5675 for (ix = 0; VEC_iterate(tree, s->v, ix, elt); ix++)
5676 @{ do something with elt @}
5677
5678 @end smallexample
5679
5680 The @file{vec.h} file provides details on how to invoke the various
5681 accessors provided. They are enumerated here:
5682
5683 @table @code
5684 @item VEC_length
5685 Return the number of items in the array,
5686
5687 @item VEC_empty
5688 Return true if the array has no elements.
5689
5690 @item VEC_last
5691 @itemx VEC_index
5692 Return the last or arbitrary item in the array.
5693
5694 @item VEC_iterate
5695 Access an array element and indicate whether the array has been
5696 traversed.
5697
5698 @item VEC_alloc
5699 @itemx VEC_free
5700 Create and destroy an array.
5701
5702 @item VEC_embedded_size
5703 @itemx VEC_embedded_init
5704 Helpers for embedding an array as the final element of another struct.
5705
5706 @item VEC_copy
5707 Duplicate an array.
5708
5709 @item VEC_space
5710 Return the amount of free space in an array.
5711
5712 @item VEC_reserve
5713 Ensure a certain amount of free space.
5714
5715 @item VEC_quick_push
5716 @itemx VEC_safe_push
5717 Append to an array, either assuming the space is available, or making
5718 sure that it is.
5719
5720 @item VEC_pop
5721 Remove the last item from an array.
5722
5723 @item VEC_truncate
5724 Remove several items from the end of an array.
5725
5726 @item VEC_safe_grow
5727 Add several items to the end of an array.
5728
5729 @item VEC_replace
5730 Overwrite an item in the array.
5731
5732 @item VEC_quick_insert
5733 @itemx VEC_safe_insert
5734 Insert an item into the middle of the array. Either the space must
5735 already exist, or the space is created.
5736
5737 @item VEC_ordered_remove
5738 @itemx VEC_unordered_remove
5739 Remove an item from the array, preserving order or not.
5740
5741 @item VEC_block_remove
5742 Remove a set of items from the array.
5743
5744 @item VEC_address
5745 Provide the address of the first element.
5746
5747 @item VEC_lower_bound
5748 Binary search the array.
5749
5750 @end table
5751
5752 @section include
5753
5754 @node Coding Standards
5755
5756 @chapter Coding Standards
5757 @cindex coding standards
5758
5759 @section @value{GDBN} C Coding Standards
5760
5761 @value{GDBN} follows the GNU coding standards, as described in
5762 @file{etc/standards.texi}. This file is also available for anonymous
5763 FTP from GNU archive sites. @value{GDBN} takes a strict interpretation
5764 of the standard; in general, when the GNU standard recommends a practice
5765 but does not require it, @value{GDBN} requires it.
5766
5767 @value{GDBN} follows an additional set of coding standards specific to
5768 @value{GDBN}, as described in the following sections.
5769
5770 @subsection ISO C
5771
5772 @value{GDBN} assumes an ISO/IEC 9899:1990 (a.k.a.@: ISO C90) compliant
5773 compiler.
5774
5775 @value{GDBN} does not assume an ISO C or POSIX compliant C library.
5776
5777 @subsection Formatting
5778
5779 @cindex source code formatting
5780 The standard GNU recommendations for formatting must be followed
5781 strictly. Any @value{GDBN}-specific deviation from GNU
5782 recomendations is described below.
5783
5784 A function declaration should not have its name in column zero. A
5785 function definition should have its name in column zero.
5786
5787 @smallexample
5788 /* Declaration */
5789 static void foo (void);
5790 /* Definition */
5791 void
5792 foo (void)
5793 @{
5794 @}
5795 @end smallexample
5796
5797 @emph{Pragmatics: This simplifies scripting. Function definitions can
5798 be found using @samp{^function-name}.}
5799
5800 There must be a space between a function or macro name and the opening
5801 parenthesis of its argument list (except for macro definitions, as
5802 required by C). There must not be a space after an open paren/bracket
5803 or before a close paren/bracket.
5804
5805 While additional whitespace is generally helpful for reading, do not use
5806 more than one blank line to separate blocks, and avoid adding whitespace
5807 after the end of a program line (as of 1/99, some 600 lines had
5808 whitespace after the semicolon). Excess whitespace causes difficulties
5809 for @code{diff} and @code{patch} utilities.
5810
5811 Pointers are declared using the traditional K&R C style:
5812
5813 @smallexample
5814 void *foo;
5815 @end smallexample
5816
5817 @noindent
5818 and not:
5819
5820 @smallexample
5821 void * foo;
5822 void* foo;
5823 @end smallexample
5824
5825 In addition, whitespace around casts and unary operators should follow
5826 the following guidelines:
5827
5828 @multitable @columnfractions .2 .2 .8
5829 @item Use... @tab ...instead of @tab
5830
5831 @item @code{!x}
5832 @tab @code{! x}
5833 @item @code{~x}
5834 @tab @code{~ x}
5835 @item @code{-x}
5836 @tab @code{- x}
5837 @tab (unary minus)
5838 @item @code{(foo) x}
5839 @tab @code{(foo)x}
5840 @tab (cast)
5841 @item @code{*x}
5842 @tab @code{* x}
5843 @tab (pointer dereference)
5844 @end multitable
5845
5846 Any two or more lines in code should be wrapped in braces, even if
5847 they are comments, as they look like separate statements:
5848
5849 @smallexample
5850 if (i)
5851 @{
5852 /* Return success. */
5853 return 0;
5854 @}
5855 @end smallexample
5856
5857 @noindent
5858 and not:
5859
5860 @smallexample
5861 if (i)
5862 /* Return success. */
5863 return 0;
5864 @end smallexample
5865
5866 @subsection Comments
5867
5868 @cindex comment formatting
5869 The standard GNU requirements on comments must be followed strictly.
5870
5871 Block comments must appear in the following form, with no @code{/*}- or
5872 @code{*/}-only lines, and no leading @code{*}:
5873
5874 @smallexample
5875 /* Wait for control to return from inferior to debugger. If inferior
5876 gets a signal, we may decide to start it up again instead of
5877 returning. That is why there is a loop in this function. When
5878 this function actually returns it means the inferior should be left
5879 stopped and @value{GDBN} should read more commands. */
5880 @end smallexample
5881
5882 (Note that this format is encouraged by Emacs; tabbing for a multi-line
5883 comment works correctly, and @kbd{M-q} fills the block consistently.)
5884
5885 Put a blank line between the block comments preceding function or
5886 variable definitions, and the definition itself.
5887
5888 In general, put function-body comments on lines by themselves, rather
5889 than trying to fit them into the 20 characters left at the end of a
5890 line, since either the comment or the code will inevitably get longer
5891 than will fit, and then somebody will have to move it anyhow.
5892
5893 @subsection C Usage
5894
5895 @cindex C data types
5896 Code must not depend on the sizes of C data types, the format of the
5897 host's floating point numbers, the alignment of anything, or the order
5898 of evaluation of expressions.
5899
5900 @cindex function usage
5901 Use functions freely. There are only a handful of compute-bound areas
5902 in @value{GDBN} that might be affected by the overhead of a function
5903 call, mainly in symbol reading. Most of @value{GDBN}'s performance is
5904 limited by the target interface (whether serial line or system call).
5905
5906 However, use functions with moderation. A thousand one-line functions
5907 are just as hard to understand as a single thousand-line function.
5908
5909 @emph{Macros are bad, M'kay.}
5910 (But if you have to use a macro, make sure that the macro arguments are
5911 protected with parentheses.)
5912
5913 @cindex types
5914
5915 Declarations like @samp{struct foo *} should be used in preference to
5916 declarations like @samp{typedef struct foo @{ @dots{} @} *foo_ptr}.
5917
5918 @subsection Function Prototypes
5919 @cindex function prototypes
5920
5921 Prototypes must be used when both @emph{declaring} and @emph{defining}
5922 a function. Prototypes for @value{GDBN} functions must include both the
5923 argument type and name, with the name matching that used in the actual
5924 function definition.
5925
5926 All external functions should have a declaration in a header file that
5927 callers include, except for @code{_initialize_*} functions, which must
5928 be external so that @file{init.c} construction works, but shouldn't be
5929 visible to random source files.
5930
5931 Where a source file needs a forward declaration of a static function,
5932 that declaration must appear in a block near the top of the source file.
5933
5934 @subsection File Names
5935
5936 Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be in lower
5937 case. Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be 8.3
5938 unique. These requirements apply to both source and generated files.
5939
5940 @emph{Pragmatics: The core of @value{GDBN} must be buildable on many
5941 platforms including DJGPP and MacOS/HFS. Every time an unfriendly file
5942 is introduced to the build process both @file{Makefile.in} and
5943 @file{configure.in} need to be modified accordingly. Compare the
5944 convoluted conversion process needed to transform @file{COPYING} into
5945 @file{copying.c} with the conversion needed to transform
5946 @file{version.in} into @file{version.c}.}
5947
5948 Any file non 8.3 compliant file (that is not used when building the core
5949 of @value{GDBN}) must be added to @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
5950
5951 @emph{Pragmatics: This is clearly a compromise.}
5952
5953 When @value{GDBN} has a local version of a system header file (ex
5954 @file{string.h}) the file name based on the POSIX header prefixed with
5955 @file{gdb_} (@file{gdb_string.h}). These headers should be relatively
5956 independent: they should use only macros defined by @file{configure},
5957 the compiler, or the host; they should include only system headers; they
5958 should refer only to system types. They may be shared between multiple
5959 programs, e.g.@: @value{GDBN} and @sc{gdbserver}.
5960
5961 For other files @samp{-} is used as the separator.
5962
5963 @subsection Include Files
5964
5965 A @file{.c} file should include @file{defs.h} first.
5966
5967 A @file{.c} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5968 declaration and/or definition it directly refers to. It cannot rely on
5969 indirect inclusion.
5970
5971 A @file{.h} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5972 declaration and/or definition it directly refers to. It cannot rely on
5973 indirect inclusion. Exception: The file @file{defs.h} does not need to
5974 be directly included.
5975
5976 An external declaration should only appear in one include file.
5977
5978 An external declaration should never appear in a @code{.c} file.
5979 Exception: a declaration for the @code{_initialize} function that
5980 pacifies @option{-Wmissing-declaration}.
5981
5982 A @code{typedef} definition should only appear in one include file.
5983
5984 An opaque @code{struct} declaration can appear in multiple @file{.h}
5985 files. Where possible, a @file{.h} file should use an opaque
5986 @code{struct} declaration instead of an include.
5987
5988 All @file{.h} files should be wrapped in:
5989
5990 @smallexample
5991 #ifndef INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5992 #define INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5993 header body
5994 #endif
5995 @end smallexample
5996
5997 @section @value{GDBN} Python Coding Standards
5998
5999 @value{GDBN} follows the published @code{Python} coding standards in
6000 @uref{http://www.python.org/dev/peps/pep-0008/, @code{PEP008}}.
6001
6002 In addition, the guidelines in the
6003 @uref{http://google-styleguide.googlecode.com/svn/trunk/pyguide.html,
6004 Google Python Style Guide} are also followed where they do not
6005 conflict with @code{PEP008}.
6006
6007 @subsection @value{GDBN}-specific exceptions
6008
6009 There are a few exceptions to the published standards.
6010 They exist mainly for consistency with the @code{C} standards.
6011
6012 @c It is expected that there are a few more exceptions,
6013 @c so we use itemize here.
6014
6015 @itemize @bullet
6016
6017 @item
6018 Use @code{FIXME} instead of @code{TODO}.
6019
6020 @end itemize
6021
6022 @node Misc Guidelines
6023
6024 @chapter Misc Guidelines
6025
6026 This chapter covers topics that are lower-level than the major
6027 algorithms of @value{GDBN}.
6028
6029 @section Cleanups
6030 @cindex cleanups
6031
6032 Cleanups are a structured way to deal with things that need to be done
6033 later.
6034
6035 When your code does something (e.g., @code{xmalloc} some memory, or
6036 @code{open} a file) that needs to be undone later (e.g., @code{xfree}
6037 the memory or @code{close} the file), it can make a cleanup. The
6038 cleanup will be done at some future point: when the command is finished
6039 and control returns to the top level; when an error occurs and the stack
6040 is unwound; or when your code decides it's time to explicitly perform
6041 cleanups. Alternatively you can elect to discard the cleanups you
6042 created.
6043
6044 Syntax:
6045
6046 @table @code
6047 @item struct cleanup *@var{old_chain};
6048 Declare a variable which will hold a cleanup chain handle.
6049
6050 @findex make_cleanup
6051 @item @var{old_chain} = make_cleanup (@var{function}, @var{arg});
6052 Make a cleanup which will cause @var{function} to be called with
6053 @var{arg} (a @code{char *}) later. The result, @var{old_chain}, is a
6054 handle that can later be passed to @code{do_cleanups} or
6055 @code{discard_cleanups}. Unless you are going to call
6056 @code{do_cleanups} or @code{discard_cleanups}, you can ignore the result
6057 from @code{make_cleanup}.
6058
6059 @findex do_cleanups
6060 @item do_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
6061 Do all cleanups added to the chain since the corresponding
6062 @code{make_cleanup} call was made.
6063
6064 @findex discard_cleanups
6065 @item discard_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
6066 Same as @code{do_cleanups} except that it just removes the cleanups from
6067 the chain and does not call the specified functions.
6068 @end table
6069
6070 Cleanups are implemented as a chain. The handle returned by
6071 @code{make_cleanups} includes the cleanup passed to the call and any
6072 later cleanups appended to the chain (but not yet discarded or
6073 performed). E.g.:
6074
6075 @smallexample
6076 make_cleanup (a, 0);
6077 @{
6078 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (b, 0);
6079 make_cleanup (c, 0)
6080 ...
6081 do_cleanups (old);
6082 @}
6083 @end smallexample
6084
6085 @noindent
6086 will call @code{c()} and @code{b()} but will not call @code{a()}. The
6087 cleanup that calls @code{a()} will remain in the cleanup chain, and will
6088 be done later unless otherwise discarded.@refill
6089
6090 Your function should explicitly do or discard the cleanups it creates.
6091 Failing to do this leads to non-deterministic behavior since the caller
6092 will arbitrarily do or discard your functions cleanups. This need leads
6093 to two common cleanup styles.
6094
6095 The first style is try/finally. Before it exits, your code-block calls
6096 @code{do_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that your
6097 code-block's cleanups are always performed. For instance, the following
6098 code-segment avoids a memory leak problem (even when @code{error} is
6099 called and a forced stack unwind occurs) by ensuring that the
6100 @code{xfree} will always be called:
6101
6102 @smallexample
6103 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (null_cleanup, 0);
6104 data = xmalloc (sizeof blah);
6105 make_cleanup (xfree, data);
6106 ... blah blah ...
6107 do_cleanups (old);
6108 @end smallexample
6109
6110 The second style is try/except. Before it exits, your code-block calls
6111 @code{discard_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that
6112 any created cleanups are not performed. For instance, the following
6113 code segment, ensures that the file will be closed but only if there is
6114 an error:
6115
6116 @smallexample
6117 FILE *file = fopen ("afile", "r");
6118 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (close_file, file);
6119 ... blah blah ...
6120 discard_cleanups (old);
6121 return file;
6122 @end smallexample
6123
6124 Some functions, e.g., @code{fputs_filtered()} or @code{error()}, specify
6125 that they ``should not be called when cleanups are not in place''. This
6126 means that any actions you need to reverse in the case of an error or
6127 interruption must be on the cleanup chain before you call these
6128 functions, since they might never return to your code (they
6129 @samp{longjmp} instead).
6130
6131 @section Per-architecture module data
6132 @cindex per-architecture module data
6133 @cindex multi-arch data
6134 @cindex data-pointer, per-architecture/per-module
6135
6136 The multi-arch framework includes a mechanism for adding module
6137 specific per-architecture data-pointers to the @code{struct gdbarch}
6138 architecture object.
6139
6140 A module registers one or more per-architecture data-pointers using:
6141
6142 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct gdbarch_data *} gdbarch_data_register_pre_init (gdbarch_data_pre_init_ftype *@var{pre_init})
6143 @var{pre_init} is used to, on-demand, allocate an initial value for a
6144 per-architecture data-pointer using the architecture's obstack (passed
6145 in as a parameter). Since @var{pre_init} can be called during
6146 architecture creation, it is not parameterized with the architecture.
6147 and must not call modules that use per-architecture data.
6148 @end deftypefn
6149
6150 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct gdbarch_data *} gdbarch_data_register_post_init (gdbarch_data_post_init_ftype *@var{post_init})
6151 @var{post_init} is used to obtain an initial value for a
6152 per-architecture data-pointer @emph{after}. Since @var{post_init} is
6153 always called after architecture creation, it both receives the fully
6154 initialized architecture and is free to call modules that use
6155 per-architecture data (care needs to be taken to ensure that those
6156 other modules do not try to call back to this module as that will
6157 create in cycles in the initialization call graph).
6158 @end deftypefn
6159
6160 These functions return a @code{struct gdbarch_data} that is used to
6161 identify the per-architecture data-pointer added for that module.
6162
6163 The per-architecture data-pointer is accessed using the function:
6164
6165 @deftypefn {Architecture Function} {void *} gdbarch_data (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct gdbarch_data *@var{data_handle})
6166 Given the architecture @var{arch} and module data handle
6167 @var{data_handle} (returned by @code{gdbarch_data_register_pre_init}
6168 or @code{gdbarch_data_register_post_init}), this function returns the
6169 current value of the per-architecture data-pointer. If the data
6170 pointer is @code{NULL}, it is first initialized by calling the
6171 corresponding @var{pre_init} or @var{post_init} method.
6172 @end deftypefn
6173
6174 The examples below assume the following definitions:
6175
6176 @smallexample
6177 struct nozel @{ int total; @};
6178 static struct gdbarch_data *nozel_handle;
6179 @end smallexample
6180
6181 A module can extend the architecture vector, adding additional
6182 per-architecture data, using the @var{pre_init} method. The module's
6183 per-architecture data is then initialized during architecture
6184 creation.
6185
6186 In the below, the module's per-architecture @emph{nozel} is added. An
6187 architecture can specify its nozel by calling @code{set_gdbarch_nozel}
6188 from @code{gdbarch_init}.
6189
6190 @smallexample
6191 static void *
6192 nozel_pre_init (struct obstack *obstack)
6193 @{
6194 struct nozel *data = OBSTACK_ZALLOC (obstack, struct nozel);
6195 return data;
6196 @}
6197 @end smallexample
6198
6199 @smallexample
6200 extern void
6201 set_gdbarch_nozel (struct gdbarch *gdbarch, int total)
6202 @{
6203 struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
6204 data->total = nozel;
6205 @}
6206 @end smallexample
6207
6208 A module can on-demand create architecture dependent data structures
6209 using @code{post_init}.
6210
6211 In the below, the nozel's total is computed on-demand by
6212 @code{nozel_post_init} using information obtained from the
6213 architecture.
6214
6215 @smallexample
6216 static void *
6217 nozel_post_init (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
6218 @{
6219 struct nozel *data = GDBARCH_OBSTACK_ZALLOC (gdbarch, struct nozel);
6220 nozel->total = gdbarch@dots{} (gdbarch);
6221 return data;
6222 @}
6223 @end smallexample
6224
6225 @smallexample
6226 extern int
6227 nozel_total (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
6228 @{
6229 struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
6230 return data->total;
6231 @}
6232 @end smallexample
6233
6234 @section Wrapping Output Lines
6235 @cindex line wrap in output
6236
6237 @findex wrap_here
6238 Output that goes through @code{printf_filtered} or @code{fputs_filtered}
6239 or @code{fputs_demangled} needs only to have calls to @code{wrap_here}
6240 added in places that would be good breaking points. The utility
6241 routines will take care of actually wrapping if the line width is
6242 exceeded.
6243
6244 The argument to @code{wrap_here} is an indentation string which is
6245 printed @emph{only} if the line breaks there. This argument is saved
6246 away and used later. It must remain valid until the next call to
6247 @code{wrap_here} or until a newline has been printed through the
6248 @code{*_filtered} functions. Don't pass in a local variable and then
6249 return!
6250
6251 It is usually best to call @code{wrap_here} after printing a comma or
6252 space. If you call it before printing a space, make sure that your
6253 indentation properly accounts for the leading space that will print if
6254 the line wraps there.
6255
6256 Any function or set of functions that produce filtered output must
6257 finish by printing a newline, to flush the wrap buffer, before switching
6258 to unfiltered (@code{printf}) output. Symbol reading routines that
6259 print warnings are a good example.
6260
6261 @section Memory Management
6262
6263 @value{GDBN} does not use the functions @code{malloc}, @code{realloc},
6264 @code{calloc}, @code{free} and @code{asprintf}.
6265
6266 @value{GDBN} uses the functions @code{xmalloc}, @code{xrealloc} and
6267 @code{xcalloc} when allocating memory. Unlike @code{malloc} et.al.@:
6268 these functions do not return when the memory pool is empty. Instead,
6269 they unwind the stack using cleanups. These functions return
6270 @code{NULL} when requested to allocate a chunk of memory of size zero.
6271
6272 @emph{Pragmatics: By using these functions, the need to check every
6273 memory allocation is removed. These functions provide portable
6274 behavior.}
6275
6276 @value{GDBN} does not use the function @code{free}.
6277
6278 @value{GDBN} uses the function @code{xfree} to return memory to the
6279 memory pool. Consistent with ISO-C, this function ignores a request to
6280 free a @code{NULL} pointer.
6281
6282 @emph{Pragmatics: On some systems @code{free} fails when passed a
6283 @code{NULL} pointer.}
6284
6285 @value{GDBN} can use the non-portable function @code{alloca} for the
6286 allocation of small temporary values (such as strings).
6287
6288 @emph{Pragmatics: This function is very non-portable. Some systems
6289 restrict the memory being allocated to no more than a few kilobytes.}
6290
6291 @value{GDBN} uses the string function @code{xstrdup} and the print
6292 function @code{xstrprintf}.
6293
6294 @emph{Pragmatics: @code{asprintf} and @code{strdup} can fail. Print
6295 functions such as @code{sprintf} are very prone to buffer overflow
6296 errors.}
6297
6298
6299 @section Compiler Warnings
6300 @cindex compiler warnings
6301
6302 With few exceptions, developers should avoid the configuration option
6303 @samp{--disable-werror} when building @value{GDBN}. The exceptions
6304 are listed in the file @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}. The default, when
6305 building with @sc{gcc}, is @samp{--enable-werror}.
6306
6307 This option causes @value{GDBN} (when built using GCC) to be compiled
6308 with a carefully selected list of compiler warning flags. Any warnings
6309 from those flags are treated as errors.
6310
6311 The current list of warning flags includes:
6312
6313 @table @samp
6314 @item -Wall
6315 Recommended @sc{gcc} warnings.
6316
6317 @item -Wdeclaration-after-statement
6318
6319 @sc{gcc} 3.x (and later) and @sc{c99} allow declarations mixed with
6320 code, but @sc{gcc} 2.x and @sc{c89} do not.
6321
6322 @item -Wpointer-arith
6323
6324 @item -Wformat-nonliteral
6325 Non-literal format strings, with a few exceptions, are bugs - they
6326 might contain unintended user-supplied format specifiers.
6327 Since @value{GDBN} uses the @code{format printf} attribute on all
6328 @code{printf} like functions this checks not just @code{printf} calls
6329 but also calls to functions such as @code{fprintf_unfiltered}.
6330
6331 @item -Wno-pointer-sign
6332 In version 4.0, GCC began warning about pointer argument passing or
6333 assignment even when the source and destination differed only in
6334 signedness. However, most @value{GDBN} code doesn't distinguish
6335 carefully between @code{char} and @code{unsigned char}. In early 2006
6336 the @value{GDBN} developers decided correcting these warnings wasn't
6337 worth the time it would take.
6338
6339 @item -Wno-unused-parameter
6340 Due to the way that @value{GDBN} is implemented many functions have
6341 unused parameters. Consequently this warning is avoided. The macro
6342 @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} is not used as it leads to false negatives ---
6343 it is not an error to have @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} on a parameter that
6344 is being used.
6345
6346 @item -Wno-unused
6347 @itemx -Wno-switch
6348 @itemx -Wno-char-subscripts
6349 These are warnings which might be useful for @value{GDBN}, but are
6350 currently too noisy to enable with @samp{-Werror}.
6351
6352 @end table
6353
6354 @section Internal Error Recovery
6355
6356 During its execution, @value{GDBN} can encounter two types of errors.
6357 User errors and internal errors. User errors include not only a user
6358 entering an incorrect command but also problems arising from corrupt
6359 object files and system errors when interacting with the target.
6360 Internal errors include situations where @value{GDBN} has detected, at
6361 run time, a corrupt or erroneous situation.
6362
6363 When reporting an internal error, @value{GDBN} uses
6364 @code{internal_error} and @code{gdb_assert}.
6365
6366 @value{GDBN} must not call @code{abort} or @code{assert}.
6367
6368 @emph{Pragmatics: There is no @code{internal_warning} function. Either
6369 the code detected a user error, recovered from it and issued a
6370 @code{warning} or the code failed to correctly recover from the user
6371 error and issued an @code{internal_error}.}
6372
6373 @section Command Names
6374
6375 GDB U/I commands are written @samp{foo-bar}, not @samp{foo_bar}.
6376
6377 @section Clean Design and Portable Implementation
6378
6379 @cindex design
6380 In addition to getting the syntax right, there's the little question of
6381 semantics. Some things are done in certain ways in @value{GDBN} because long
6382 experience has shown that the more obvious ways caused various kinds of
6383 trouble.
6384
6385 @cindex assumptions about targets
6386 You can't assume the byte order of anything that comes from a target
6387 (including @var{value}s, object files, and instructions). Such things
6388 must be byte-swapped using @code{SWAP_TARGET_AND_HOST} in
6389 @value{GDBN}, or one of the swap routines defined in @file{bfd.h},
6390 such as @code{bfd_get_32}.
6391
6392 You can't assume that you know what interface is being used to talk to
6393 the target system. All references to the target must go through the
6394 current @code{target_ops} vector.
6395
6396 You can't assume that the host and target machines are the same machine
6397 (except in the ``native'' support modules). In particular, you can't
6398 assume that the target machine's header files will be available on the
6399 host machine. Target code must bring along its own header files --
6400 written from scratch or explicitly donated by their owner, to avoid
6401 copyright problems.
6402
6403 @cindex portability
6404 Insertion of new @code{#ifdef}'s will be frowned upon. It's much better
6405 to write the code portably than to conditionalize it for various
6406 systems.
6407
6408 @cindex system dependencies
6409 New @code{#ifdef}'s which test for specific compilers or manufacturers
6410 or operating systems are unacceptable. All @code{#ifdef}'s should test
6411 for features. The information about which configurations contain which
6412 features should be segregated into the configuration files. Experience
6413 has proven far too often that a feature unique to one particular system
6414 often creeps into other systems; and that a conditional based on some
6415 predefined macro for your current system will become worthless over
6416 time, as new versions of your system come out that behave differently
6417 with regard to this feature.
6418
6419 Adding code that handles specific architectures, operating systems,
6420 target interfaces, or hosts, is not acceptable in generic code.
6421
6422 @cindex portable file name handling
6423 @cindex file names, portability
6424 One particularly notorious area where system dependencies tend to
6425 creep in is handling of file names. The mainline @value{GDBN} code
6426 assumes Posix semantics of file names: absolute file names begin with
6427 a forward slash @file{/}, slashes are used to separate leading
6428 directories, case-sensitive file names. These assumptions are not
6429 necessarily true on non-Posix systems such as MS-Windows. To avoid
6430 system-dependent code where you need to take apart or construct a file
6431 name, use the following portable macros:
6432
6433 @table @code
6434 @findex HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
6435 @item HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
6436 This preprocessing symbol is defined to a non-zero value on hosts
6437 whose filesystems belong to the MS-DOS/MS-Windows family. Use this
6438 symbol to write conditional code which should only be compiled for
6439 such hosts.
6440
6441 @findex IS_DIR_SEPARATOR
6442 @item IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (@var{c})
6443 Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{c} is a directory separator
6444 character. On Unix and GNU/Linux systems, only a slash @file{/} is
6445 such a character, but on Windows, both @file{/} and @file{\} will
6446 pass.
6447
6448 @findex IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH
6449 @item IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (@var{file})
6450 Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{file} is an absolute file name.
6451 For Unix and GNU/Linux hosts, a name which begins with a slash
6452 @file{/} is absolute. On DOS and Windows, @file{d:/foo} and
6453 @file{x:\bar} are also absolute file names.
6454
6455 @findex FILENAME_CMP
6456 @item FILENAME_CMP (@var{f1}, @var{f2})
6457 Calls a function which compares file names @var{f1} and @var{f2} as
6458 appropriate for the underlying host filesystem. For Posix systems,
6459 this simply calls @code{strcmp}; on case-insensitive filesystems it
6460 will call @code{strcasecmp} instead.
6461
6462 @findex DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
6463 @item DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
6464 Evaluates to a character which separates directories in
6465 @code{PATH}-style lists, typically held in environment variables.
6466 This character is @samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on DOS and Windows.
6467
6468 @findex SLASH_STRING
6469 @item SLASH_STRING
6470 This evaluates to a constant string you should use to produce an
6471 absolute filename from leading directories and the file's basename.
6472 @code{SLASH_STRING} is @code{"/"} on most systems, but might be
6473 @code{"\\"} for some Windows-based ports.
6474 @end table
6475
6476 In addition to using these macros, be sure to use portable library
6477 functions whenever possible. For example, to extract a directory or a
6478 basename part from a file name, use the @code{dirname} and
6479 @code{basename} library functions (available in @code{libiberty} for
6480 platforms which don't provide them), instead of searching for a slash
6481 with @code{strrchr}.
6482
6483 Another way to generalize @value{GDBN} along a particular interface is with an
6484 attribute struct. For example, @value{GDBN} has been generalized to handle
6485 multiple kinds of remote interfaces---not by @code{#ifdef}s everywhere, but
6486 by defining the @code{target_ops} structure and having a current target (as
6487 well as a stack of targets below it, for memory references). Whenever
6488 something needs to be done that depends on which remote interface we are
6489 using, a flag in the current target_ops structure is tested (e.g.,
6490 @code{target_has_stack}), or a function is called through a pointer in the
6491 current target_ops structure. In this way, when a new remote interface
6492 is added, only one module needs to be touched---the one that actually
6493 implements the new remote interface. Other examples of
6494 attribute-structs are BFD access to multiple kinds of object file
6495 formats, or @value{GDBN}'s access to multiple source languages.
6496
6497 Please avoid duplicating code. For example, in @value{GDBN} 3.x all
6498 the code interfacing between @code{ptrace} and the rest of
6499 @value{GDBN} was duplicated in @file{*-dep.c}, and so changing
6500 something was very painful. In @value{GDBN} 4.x, these have all been
6501 consolidated into @file{infptrace.c}. @file{infptrace.c} can deal
6502 with variations between systems the same way any system-independent
6503 file would (hooks, @code{#if defined}, etc.), and machines which are
6504 radically different don't need to use @file{infptrace.c} at all.
6505
6506 All debugging code must be controllable using the @samp{set debug
6507 @var{module}} command. Do not use @code{printf} to print trace
6508 messages. Use @code{fprintf_unfiltered(gdb_stdlog, ...}. Do not use
6509 @code{#ifdef DEBUG}.
6510
6511 @node Porting GDB
6512
6513 @chapter Porting @value{GDBN}
6514 @cindex porting to new machines
6515
6516 Most of the work in making @value{GDBN} compile on a new machine is in
6517 specifying the configuration of the machine. Porting a new
6518 architecture to @value{GDBN} can be broken into a number of steps.
6519
6520 @itemize @bullet
6521
6522 @item
6523 Ensure a @sc{bfd} exists for executables of the target architecture in
6524 the @file{bfd} directory. If one does not exist, create one by
6525 modifying an existing similar one.
6526
6527 @item
6528 Implement a disassembler for the target architecture in the @file{opcodes}
6529 directory.
6530
6531 @item
6532 Define the target architecture in the @file{gdb} directory
6533 (@pxref{Adding a New Target, , Adding a New Target}). Add the pattern
6534 for the new target to @file{configure.tgt} with the names of the files
6535 that contain the code. By convention the target architecture
6536 definition for an architecture @var{arch} is placed in
6537 @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}.
6538
6539 Within @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c} define the function
6540 @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} which calls
6541 @code{gdbarch_register} to create the new @code{@w{struct
6542 gdbarch}} for the architecture.
6543
6544 @item
6545 If a new remote target is needed, consider adding a new remote target
6546 by defining a function
6547 @code{_initialize_remote_@var{arch}}. However if at all possible
6548 use the @value{GDBN} @emph{Remote Serial Protocol} for this and implement
6549 the server side protocol independently with the target.
6550
6551 @item
6552 If desired implement a simulator in the @file{sim} directory. This
6553 should create the library @file{libsim.a} implementing the interface
6554 in @file{remote-sim.h} (found in the @file{include} directory).
6555
6556 @item
6557 Build and test. If desired, lobby the @sc{gdb} steering group to
6558 have the new port included in the main distribution!
6559
6560 @item
6561 Add a description of the new architecture to the main @value{GDBN} user
6562 guide (@pxref{Configuration Specific Information, , Configuration
6563 Specific Information, gdb, Debugging with @value{GDBN}}).
6564
6565 @end itemize
6566
6567 @node Versions and Branches
6568 @chapter Versions and Branches
6569
6570 @section Versions
6571
6572 @value{GDBN}'s version is determined by the file
6573 @file{gdb/version.in} and takes one of the following forms:
6574
6575 @table @asis
6576 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}
6577 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}
6578 an official release (e.g., 6.2 or 6.2.1)
6579 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6580 a snapshot taken at @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD}-gmt (e.g.,
6581 6.1.50.20020302, 6.1.90.20020304, or 6.1.0.20020308)
6582 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-cvs
6583 a @sc{cvs} check out drawn on @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD} (e.g.,
6584 6.1.50.20020302-cvs, 6.1.90.20020304-cvs, or 6.1.0.20020308-cvs)
6585 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} (@var{vendor})
6586 a vendor specific release of @value{GDBN}, that while based on@*
6587 @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD},
6588 may include additional changes
6589 @end table
6590
6591 @value{GDBN}'s mainline uses the @var{major} and @var{minor} version
6592 numbers from the most recent release branch, with a @var{patchlevel}
6593 of 50. At the time each new release branch is created, the mainline's
6594 @var{major} and @var{minor} version numbers are updated.
6595
6596 @value{GDBN}'s release branch is similar. When the branch is cut, the
6597 @var{patchlevel} is changed from 50 to 90. As draft releases are
6598 drawn from the branch, the @var{patchlevel} is incremented. Once the
6599 first release (@var{major}.@var{minor}) has been made, the
6600 @var{patchlevel} is set to 0 and updates have an incremented
6601 @var{patchlevel}.
6602
6603 For snapshots, and @sc{cvs} check outs, it is also possible to
6604 identify the @sc{cvs} origin:
6605
6606 @table @asis
6607 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.50.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6608 drawn from the @sc{head} of mainline @sc{cvs} (e.g., 6.1.50.20020302)
6609 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.90.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6610 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.91.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
6611 drawn from a release branch prior to the release (e.g.,
6612 6.1.90.20020304)
6613 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.0.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6614 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.1.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
6615 drawn from a release branch after the release (e.g., 6.2.0.20020308)
6616 @end table
6617
6618 If the previous @value{GDBN} version is 6.1 and the current version is
6619 6.2, then, substituting 6 for @var{major} and 1 or 2 for @var{minor},
6620 here's an illustration of a typical sequence:
6621
6622 @smallexample
6623 <HEAD>
6624 |
6625 6.1.50.20020302-cvs
6626 |
6627 +--------------------------.
6628 | <gdb_6_2-branch>
6629 | |
6630 6.2.50.20020303-cvs 6.1.90 (draft #1)
6631 | |
6632 6.2.50.20020304-cvs 6.1.90.20020304-cvs
6633 | |
6634 6.2.50.20020305-cvs 6.1.91 (draft #2)
6635 | |
6636 6.2.50.20020306-cvs 6.1.91.20020306-cvs
6637 | |
6638 6.2.50.20020307-cvs 6.2 (release)
6639 | |
6640 6.2.50.20020308-cvs 6.2.0.20020308-cvs
6641 | |
6642 6.2.50.20020309-cvs 6.2.1 (update)
6643 | |
6644 6.2.50.20020310-cvs <branch closed>
6645 |
6646 6.2.50.20020311-cvs
6647 |
6648 +--------------------------.
6649 | <gdb_6_3-branch>
6650 | |
6651 6.3.50.20020312-cvs 6.2.90 (draft #1)
6652 | |
6653 @end smallexample
6654
6655 @section Release Branches
6656 @cindex Release Branches
6657
6658 @value{GDBN} draws a release series (6.2, 6.2.1, @dots{}) from a
6659 single release branch, and identifies that branch using the @sc{cvs}
6660 branch tags:
6661
6662 @smallexample
6663 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-branchpoint
6664 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-branch
6665 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-release
6666 @end smallexample
6667
6668 @emph{Pragmatics: To help identify the date at which a branch or
6669 release is made, both the branchpoint and release tags include the
6670 date that they are cut (@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}) in the tag. The
6671 branch tag, denoting the head of the branch, does not need this.}
6672
6673 @section Vendor Branches
6674 @cindex vendor branches
6675
6676 To avoid version conflicts, vendors are expected to modify the file
6677 @file{gdb/version.in} to include a vendor unique alphabetic identifier
6678 (an official @value{GDBN} release never uses alphabetic characters in
6679 its version identifier). E.g., @samp{6.2widgit2}, or @samp{6.2 (Widgit
6680 Inc Patch 2)}.
6681
6682 @section Experimental Branches
6683 @cindex experimental branches
6684
6685 @subsection Guidelines
6686
6687 @value{GDBN} permits the creation of branches, cut from the @sc{cvs}
6688 repository, for experimental development. Branches make it possible
6689 for developers to share preliminary work, and maintainers to examine
6690 significant new developments.
6691
6692 The following are a set of guidelines for creating such branches:
6693
6694 @table @emph
6695
6696 @item a branch has an owner
6697 The owner can set further policy for a branch, but may not change the
6698 ground rules. In particular, they can set a policy for commits (be it
6699 adding more reviewers or deciding who can commit).
6700
6701 @item all commits are posted
6702 All changes committed to a branch shall also be posted to
6703 @email{gdb-patches@@sourceware.org, the @value{GDBN} patches
6704 mailing list}. While commentary on such changes are encouraged, people
6705 should remember that the changes only apply to a branch.
6706
6707 @item all commits are covered by an assignment
6708 This ensures that all changes belong to the Free Software Foundation,
6709 and avoids the possibility that the branch may become contaminated.
6710
6711 @item a branch is focused
6712 A focused branch has a single objective or goal, and does not contain
6713 unnecessary or irrelevant changes. Cleanups, where identified, being
6714 be pushed into the mainline as soon as possible.
6715
6716 @item a branch tracks mainline
6717 This keeps the level of divergence under control. It also keeps the
6718 pressure on developers to push cleanups and other stuff into the
6719 mainline.
6720
6721 @item a branch shall contain the entire @value{GDBN} module
6722 The @value{GDBN} module @code{gdb} should be specified when creating a
6723 branch (branches of individual files should be avoided). @xref{Tags}.
6724
6725 @item a branch shall be branded using @file{version.in}
6726 The file @file{gdb/version.in} shall be modified so that it identifies
6727 the branch @var{owner} and branch @var{name}, e.g.,
6728 @samp{6.2.50.20030303_owner_name} or @samp{6.2 (Owner Name)}.
6729
6730 @end table
6731
6732 @subsection Tags
6733 @anchor{Tags}
6734
6735 To simplify the identification of @value{GDBN} branches, the following
6736 branch tagging convention is strongly recommended:
6737
6738 @table @code
6739
6740 @item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6741 @itemx @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch
6742 The branch point and corresponding branch tag. @var{YYYYMMDD} is the
6743 date that the branch was created. A branch is created using the
6744 sequence: @anchor{experimental branch tags}
6745 @smallexample
6746 cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint gdb
6747 cvs rtag -b -r @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint \
6748 @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch gdb
6749 @end smallexample
6750
6751 @item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6752 The tagged point, on the mainline, that was used when merging the branch
6753 on @var{yyyymmdd}. To merge in all changes since the branch was cut,
6754 use a command sequence like:
6755 @smallexample
6756 cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint gdb
6757 cvs update \
6758 -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6759 -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6760 @end smallexample
6761 @noindent
6762 Similar sequences can be used to just merge in changes since the last
6763 merge.
6764
6765 @end table
6766
6767 @noindent
6768 For further information on @sc{cvs}, see
6769 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/cvs/, Concurrent Versions System}.
6770
6771 @node Start of New Year Procedure
6772 @chapter Start of New Year Procedure
6773 @cindex new year procedure
6774
6775 At the start of each new year, the following actions should be performed:
6776
6777 @itemize @bullet
6778 @item
6779 Rotate the ChangeLog file
6780
6781 The current @file{ChangeLog} file should be renamed into
6782 @file{ChangeLog-YYYY} where YYYY is the year that has just passed.
6783 A new @file{ChangeLog} file should be created, and its contents should
6784 contain a reference to the previous ChangeLog. The following should
6785 also be preserved at the end of the new ChangeLog, in order to provide
6786 the appropriate settings when editing this file with Emacs:
6787 @smallexample
6788 Local Variables:
6789 mode: change-log
6790 left-margin: 8
6791 fill-column: 74
6792 version-control: never
6793 coding: utf-8
6794 End:
6795 @end smallexample
6796
6797 @item
6798 Add an entry for the newly created ChangeLog file (@file{ChangeLog-YYYY})
6799 in @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
6800
6801 @item
6802 Update the copyright year in the startup message
6803
6804 Update the copyright year in:
6805 @itemize @bullet
6806 @item
6807 file @file{top.c}, function @code{print_gdb_version}
6808 @item
6809 file @file{gdbserver/server.c}, function @code{gdbserver_version}
6810 @item
6811 file @file{gdbserver/gdbreplay.c}, function @code{gdbreplay_version}
6812 @end itemize
6813
6814 @item
6815 Run the @file{copyright.py} Python script to add the new year in the copyright
6816 notices of most source files. This script has been tested with Python
6817 2.6 and 2.7.
6818
6819 @end itemize
6820
6821 @node Releasing GDB
6822
6823 @chapter Releasing @value{GDBN}
6824 @cindex making a new release of gdb
6825
6826 @section Branch Commit Policy
6827
6828 The branch commit policy is pretty slack. @value{GDBN} releases 5.0,
6829 5.1 and 5.2 all used the below:
6830
6831 @itemize @bullet
6832 @item
6833 The @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS} file still holds.
6834 @item
6835 Don't fix something on the branch unless/until it is also fixed in the
6836 trunk. If this isn't possible, mentioning it in the @file{gdb/PROBLEMS}
6837 file is better than committing a hack.
6838 @item
6839 When considering a patch for the branch, suggested criteria include:
6840 Does it fix a build? Does it fix the sequence @kbd{break main; run}
6841 when debugging a static binary?
6842 @item
6843 The further a change is from the core of @value{GDBN}, the less likely
6844 the change will worry anyone (e.g., target specific code).
6845 @item
6846 Only post a proposal to change the core of @value{GDBN} after you've
6847 sent individual bribes to all the people listed in the
6848 @file{MAINTAINERS} file @t{;-)}
6849 @end itemize
6850
6851 @emph{Pragmatics: Provided updates are restricted to non-core
6852 functionality there is little chance that a broken change will be fatal.
6853 This means that changes such as adding a new architectures or (within
6854 reason) support for a new host are considered acceptable.}
6855
6856
6857 @section Obsoleting code
6858
6859 Before anything else, poke the other developers (and around the source
6860 code) to see if there is anything that can be removed from @value{GDBN}
6861 (an old target, an unused file).
6862
6863 Obsolete code is identified by adding an @code{OBSOLETE} prefix to every
6864 line. Doing this means that it is easy to identify something that has
6865 been obsoleted when greping through the sources.
6866
6867 The process is done in stages --- this is mainly to ensure that the
6868 wider @value{GDBN} community has a reasonable opportunity to respond.
6869 Remember, everything on the Internet takes a week.
6870
6871 @enumerate
6872 @item
6873 Post the proposal on @email{gdb@@sourceware.org, the GDB mailing
6874 list} Creating a bug report to track the task's state, is also highly
6875 recommended.
6876 @item
6877 Wait a week or so.
6878 @item
6879 Post the proposal on @email{gdb-announce@@sourceware.org, the GDB
6880 Announcement mailing list}.
6881 @item
6882 Wait a week or so.
6883 @item
6884 Go through and edit all relevant files and lines so that they are
6885 prefixed with the word @code{OBSOLETE}.
6886 @item
6887 Wait until the next GDB version, containing this obsolete code, has been
6888 released.
6889 @item
6890 Remove the obsolete code.
6891 @end enumerate
6892
6893 @noindent
6894 @emph{Maintainer note: While removing old code is regrettable it is
6895 hopefully better for @value{GDBN}'s long term development. Firstly it
6896 helps the developers by removing code that is either no longer relevant
6897 or simply wrong. Secondly since it removes any history associated with
6898 the file (effectively clearing the slate) the developer has a much freer
6899 hand when it comes to fixing broken files.}
6900
6901
6902
6903 @section Before the Branch
6904
6905 The most important objective at this stage is to find and fix simple
6906 changes that become a pain to track once the branch is created. For
6907 instance, configuration problems that stop @value{GDBN} from even
6908 building. If you can't get the problem fixed, document it in the
6909 @file{gdb/PROBLEMS} file.
6910
6911 @subheading Prompt for @file{gdb/NEWS}
6912
6913 People always forget. Send a post reminding them but also if you know
6914 something interesting happened add it yourself. The @code{schedule}
6915 script will mention this in its e-mail.
6916
6917 @subheading Review @file{gdb/README}
6918
6919 Grab one of the nightly snapshots and then walk through the
6920 @file{gdb/README} looking for anything that can be improved. The
6921 @code{schedule} script will mention this in its e-mail.
6922
6923 @subheading Refresh any imported files.
6924
6925 A number of files are taken from external repositories. They include:
6926
6927 @itemize @bullet
6928 @item
6929 @file{texinfo/texinfo.tex}
6930 @item
6931 @file{config.guess} et.@: al.@: (see the top-level @file{MAINTAINERS}
6932 file)
6933 @item
6934 @file{etc/standards.texi}, @file{etc/make-stds.texi}
6935 @end itemize
6936
6937 @subheading Check the ARI
6938
6939 @uref{http://sourceware.org/gdb/ari,,A.R.I.} is an @code{awk} script
6940 (Awk Regression Index ;-) that checks for a number of errors and coding
6941 conventions. The checks include things like using @code{malloc} instead
6942 of @code{xmalloc} and file naming problems. There shouldn't be any
6943 regressions.
6944
6945 @subsection Review the bug data base
6946
6947 Close anything obviously fixed.
6948
6949 @subsection Check all cross targets build
6950
6951 The targets are listed in @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.
6952
6953
6954 @section Cut the Branch
6955
6956 @subheading Create the branch
6957
6958 @smallexample
6959 $ u=5.1
6960 $ v=5.2
6961 $ V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6962 $ D=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6963 $ echo $u $V $D
6964 5.1 5_2 2002-03-03
6965 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag \
6966 -D $D-gmt gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint insight
6967 cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag
6968 -D 2002-03-03-gmt gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint insight
6969 $ ^echo ^^
6970 ...
6971 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag \
6972 -b -r gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint gdb_$V-branch insight
6973 cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag \
6974 -b -r gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint gdb_5_2-branch insight
6975 $ ^echo ^^
6976 ...
6977 $
6978 @end smallexample
6979
6980 @itemize @bullet
6981 @item
6982 By using @kbd{-D YYYY-MM-DD-gmt}, the branch is forced to an exact
6983 date/time.
6984 @item
6985 The trunk is first tagged so that the branch point can easily be found.
6986 @item
6987 Insight, which includes @value{GDBN}, is tagged at the same time.
6988 @item
6989 @file{version.in} gets bumped to avoid version number conflicts.
6990 @item
6991 The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled using @file{-f}.
6992 @end itemize
6993
6994 @subheading Update @file{version.in}
6995
6996 @smallexample
6997 $ u=5.1
6998 $ v=5.2
6999 $ V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
7000 $ echo $u $v$V
7001 5.1 5_2
7002 $ cd /tmp
7003 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src co \
7004 -r gdb_$V-branch src/gdb/version.in
7005 cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src co
7006 -r gdb_5_2-branch src/gdb/version.in
7007 $ ^echo ^^
7008 U src/gdb/version.in
7009 $ cd src/gdb
7010 $ echo $u.90-0000-00-00-cvs > version.in
7011 $ cat version.in
7012 5.1.90-0000-00-00-cvs
7013 $ cvs -f commit version.in
7014 @end smallexample
7015
7016 @itemize @bullet
7017 @item
7018 @file{0000-00-00} is used as a date to pump prime the version.in update
7019 mechanism.
7020 @item
7021 @file{.90} and the previous branch version are used as fairly arbitrary
7022 initial branch version number.
7023 @end itemize
7024
7025
7026 @subheading Update the web and news pages
7027
7028 Something?
7029
7030 @subheading Tweak cron to track the new branch
7031
7032 The file @file{gdbadmin/cron/crontab} contains gdbadmin's cron table.
7033 This file needs to be updated so that:
7034
7035 @itemize @bullet
7036 @item
7037 A daily timestamp is added to the file @file{version.in}.
7038 @item
7039 The new branch is included in the snapshot process.
7040 @end itemize
7041
7042 @noindent
7043 See the file @file{gdbadmin/cron/README} for how to install the updated
7044 cron table.
7045
7046 The file @file{gdbadmin/ss/README} should also be reviewed to reflect
7047 any changes. That file is copied to both the branch/ and current/
7048 snapshot directories.
7049
7050
7051 @subheading Update the NEWS and README files
7052
7053 The @file{NEWS} file needs to be updated so that on the branch it refers
7054 to @emph{changes in the current release} while on the trunk it also
7055 refers to @emph{changes since the current release}.
7056
7057 The @file{README} file needs to be updated so that it refers to the
7058 current release.
7059
7060 @subheading Post the branch info
7061
7062 Send an announcement to the mailing lists:
7063
7064 @itemize @bullet
7065 @item
7066 @email{gdb-announce@@sourceware.org, GDB Announcement mailing list}
7067 @item
7068 @email{gdb@@sourceware.org, GDB Discussion mailing list} and
7069 @email{gdb-testers@@sourceware.org, GDB Testers mailing list}
7070 @end itemize
7071
7072 @emph{Pragmatics: The branch creation is sent to the announce list to
7073 ensure that people people not subscribed to the higher volume discussion
7074 list are alerted.}
7075
7076 The announcement should include:
7077
7078 @itemize @bullet
7079 @item
7080 The branch tag.
7081 @item
7082 How to check out the branch using CVS.
7083 @item
7084 The date/number of weeks until the release.
7085 @item
7086 The branch commit policy still holds.
7087 @end itemize
7088
7089 @section Stabilize the branch
7090
7091 Something goes here.
7092
7093 @section Create a Release
7094
7095 The process of creating and then making available a release is broken
7096 down into a number of stages. The first part addresses the technical
7097 process of creating a releasable tar ball. The later stages address the
7098 process of releasing that tar ball.
7099
7100 When making a release candidate just the first section is needed.
7101
7102 @subsection Create a release candidate
7103
7104 The objective at this stage is to create a set of tar balls that can be
7105 made available as a formal release (or as a less formal release
7106 candidate).
7107
7108 @subsubheading Freeze the branch
7109
7110 Send out an e-mail notifying everyone that the branch is frozen to
7111 @email{gdb-patches@@sourceware.org}.
7112
7113 @subsubheading Establish a few defaults.
7114
7115 @smallexample
7116 $ b=gdb_5_2-branch
7117 $ v=5.2
7118 $ t=/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp
7119 $ echo $t/$b/$v
7120 /sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
7121 $ mkdir -p $t/$b/$v
7122 $ cd $t/$b/$v
7123 $ pwd
7124 /sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
7125 $ which autoconf
7126 /home/gdbadmin/bin/autoconf
7127 $
7128 @end smallexample
7129
7130 @noindent
7131 Notes:
7132
7133 @itemize @bullet
7134 @item
7135 Check the @code{autoconf} version carefully. You want to be using the
7136 version documented in the toplevel @file{README-maintainer-mode} file.
7137 It is very unlikely that the version of @code{autoconf} installed in
7138 system directories (e.g., @file{/usr/bin/autoconf}) is correct.
7139 @end itemize
7140
7141 @subsubheading Check out the relevant modules:
7142
7143 @smallexample
7144 $ for m in gdb insight
7145 do
7146 ( mkdir -p $m && cd $m && cvs -q -f -d /cvs/src co -P -r $b $m )
7147 done
7148 $
7149 @end smallexample
7150
7151 @noindent
7152 Note:
7153
7154 @itemize @bullet
7155 @item
7156 The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled (@file{-f}) so that there isn't
7157 any confusion between what is written here and what your local
7158 @code{cvs} really does.
7159 @end itemize
7160
7161 @subsubheading Update relevant files.
7162
7163 @table @file
7164
7165 @item gdb/NEWS
7166
7167 Major releases get their comments added as part of the mainline. Minor
7168 releases should probably mention any significant bugs that were fixed.
7169
7170 Don't forget to include the @file{ChangeLog} entry.
7171
7172 @smallexample
7173 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/NEWS
7174 ...
7175 c-x 4 a
7176 ...
7177 c-x c-s c-x c-c
7178 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/NEWS insight/src/gdb/NEWS
7179 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7180 @end smallexample
7181
7182 @item gdb/README
7183
7184 You'll need to update:
7185
7186 @itemize @bullet
7187 @item
7188 The version.
7189 @item
7190 The update date.
7191 @item
7192 Who did it.
7193 @end itemize
7194
7195 @smallexample
7196 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/README
7197 ...
7198 c-x 4 a
7199 ...
7200 c-x c-s c-x c-c
7201 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/README insight/src/gdb/README
7202 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7203 @end smallexample
7204
7205 @emph{Maintainer note: Hopefully the @file{README} file was reviewed
7206 before the initial branch was cut so just a simple substitute is needed
7207 to get it updated.}
7208
7209 @emph{Maintainer note: Other projects generate @file{README} and
7210 @file{INSTALL} from the core documentation. This might be worth
7211 pursuing.}
7212
7213 @item gdb/version.in
7214
7215 @smallexample
7216 $ echo $v > gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7217 $ cat gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7218 5.2
7219 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7220 ...
7221 c-x 4 a
7222 ... Bump to version ...
7223 c-x c-s c-x c-c
7224 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/version.in insight/src/gdb/version.in
7225 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7226 @end smallexample
7227
7228 @end table
7229
7230 @subsubheading Do the dirty work
7231
7232 This is identical to the process used to create the daily snapshot.
7233
7234 @smallexample
7235 $ for m in gdb insight
7236 do
7237 ( cd $m/src && gmake -f src-release $m.tar )
7238 done
7239 @end smallexample
7240
7241 If the top level source directory does not have @file{src-release}
7242 (@value{GDBN} version 5.3.1 or earlier), try these commands instead:
7243
7244 @smallexample
7245 $ for m in gdb insight
7246 do
7247 ( cd $m/src && gmake -f Makefile.in $m.tar )
7248 done
7249 @end smallexample
7250
7251 @subsubheading Check the source files
7252
7253 You're looking for files that have mysteriously disappeared.
7254 @kbd{distclean} has the habit of deleting files it shouldn't. Watch out
7255 for the @file{version.in} update @kbd{cronjob}.
7256
7257 @smallexample
7258 $ ( cd gdb/src && cvs -f -q -n update )
7259 M djunpack.bat
7260 ? gdb-5.1.91.tar
7261 ? proto-toplev
7262 @dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
7263 M gdb/ChangeLog
7264 M gdb/NEWS
7265 M gdb/README
7266 M gdb/version.in
7267 @dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
7268 $
7269 @end smallexample
7270
7271 @noindent
7272 @emph{Don't worry about the @file{gdb.info-??} or
7273 @file{gdb/p-exp.tab.c}. They were generated (and yes @file{gdb.info-1}
7274 was also generated only something strange with CVS means that they
7275 didn't get suppressed). Fixing it would be nice though.}
7276
7277 @subsubheading Create compressed versions of the release
7278
7279 @smallexample
7280 $ cp */src/*.tar .
7281 $ cp */src/*.bz2 .
7282 $ ls -F
7283 gdb/ gdb-5.2.tar insight/ insight-5.2.tar
7284 $ for m in gdb insight
7285 do
7286 bzip2 -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.bz2
7287 gzip -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.gz
7288 done
7289 $
7290 @end smallexample
7291
7292 @noindent
7293 Note:
7294
7295 @itemize @bullet
7296 @item
7297 A pipe such as @kbd{bunzip2 < xxx.bz2 | gzip -9 > xxx.gz} is not since,
7298 in that mode, @code{gzip} does not know the name of the file and, hence,
7299 can not include it in the compressed file. This is also why the release
7300 process runs @code{tar} and @code{bzip2} as separate passes.
7301 @end itemize
7302
7303 @subsection Sanity check the tar ball
7304
7305 Pick a popular machine (Solaris/PPC?) and try the build on that.
7306
7307 @smallexample
7308 $ bunzip2 < gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 | tar xpf -
7309 $ cd gdb-5.2
7310 $ ./configure
7311 $ make
7312 @dots{}
7313 $ ./gdb/gdb ./gdb/gdb
7314 GNU gdb 5.2
7315 @dots{}
7316 (gdb) b main
7317 Breakpoint 1 at 0x80732bc: file main.c, line 734.
7318 (gdb) run
7319 Starting program: /tmp/gdb-5.2/gdb/gdb
7320
7321 Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xbffff8b4) at main.c:734
7322 734 catch_errors (captured_main, &args, "", RETURN_MASK_ALL);
7323 (gdb) print args
7324 $1 = @{argc = 136426532, argv = 0x821b7f0@}
7325 (gdb)
7326 @end smallexample
7327
7328 @subsection Make a release candidate available
7329
7330 If this is a release candidate then the only remaining steps are:
7331
7332 @enumerate
7333 @item
7334 Commit @file{version.in} and @file{ChangeLog}
7335 @item
7336 Tweak @file{version.in} (and @file{ChangeLog} to read
7337 @var{L}.@var{M}.@var{N}-0000-00-00-cvs so that the version update
7338 process can restart.
7339 @item
7340 Make the release candidate available in
7341 @uref{ftp://sourceware.org/pub/gdb/snapshots/branch}
7342 @item
7343 Notify the relevant mailing lists ( @email{gdb@@sourceware.org} and
7344 @email{gdb-testers@@sourceware.org} that the candidate is available.
7345 @end enumerate
7346
7347 @subsection Make a formal release available
7348
7349 (And you thought all that was required was to post an e-mail.)
7350
7351 @subsubheading Install on sware
7352
7353 Copy the new files to both the release and the old release directory:
7354
7355 @smallexample
7356 $ cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/old-releases/
7357 $ cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
7358 @end smallexample
7359
7360 @noindent
7361 Clean up the releases directory so that only the most recent releases
7362 are available (e.g.@: keep 5.2 and 5.2.1 but remove 5.1):
7363
7364 @smallexample
7365 $ cd ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
7366 $ rm @dots{}
7367 @end smallexample
7368
7369 @noindent
7370 Update the file @file{README} and @file{.message} in the releases
7371 directory:
7372
7373 @smallexample
7374 $ vi README
7375 @dots{}
7376 $ rm -f .message
7377 $ ln README .message
7378 @end smallexample
7379
7380 @subsubheading Update the web pages.
7381
7382 @table @file
7383
7384 @item htdocs/download/ANNOUNCEMENT
7385 This file, which is posted as the official announcement, includes:
7386 @itemize @bullet
7387 @item
7388 General announcement.
7389 @item
7390 News. If making an @var{M}.@var{N}.1 release, retain the news from
7391 earlier @var{M}.@var{N} release.
7392 @item
7393 Errata.
7394 @end itemize
7395
7396 @item htdocs/index.html
7397 @itemx htdocs/news/index.html
7398 @itemx htdocs/download/index.html
7399 These files include:
7400 @itemize @bullet
7401 @item
7402 Announcement of the most recent release.
7403 @item
7404 News entry (remember to update both the top level and the news directory).
7405 @end itemize
7406 These pages also need to be regenerate using @code{index.sh}.
7407
7408 @item download/onlinedocs/
7409 You need to find the magic command that is used to generate the online
7410 docs from the @file{.tar.bz2}. The best way is to look in the output
7411 from one of the nightly @code{cron} jobs and then just edit accordingly.
7412 Something like:
7413
7414 @smallexample
7415 $ ~/ss/update-web-docs \
7416 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
7417 $PWD/www \
7418 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/onlinedocs \
7419 gdb
7420 @end smallexample
7421
7422 @item download/ari/
7423 Just like the online documentation. Something like:
7424
7425 @smallexample
7426 $ /bin/sh ~/ss/update-web-ari \
7427 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
7428 $PWD/www \
7429 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/ari \
7430 gdb
7431 @end smallexample
7432
7433 @end table
7434
7435 @subsubheading Shadow the pages onto gnu
7436
7437 Something goes here.
7438
7439
7440 @subsubheading Install the @value{GDBN} tar ball on GNU
7441
7442 At the time of writing, the GNU machine was @kbd{gnudist.gnu.org} in
7443 @file{~ftp/gnu/gdb}.
7444
7445 @subsubheading Make the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT}
7446
7447 Post the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT} file you created above to:
7448
7449 @itemize @bullet
7450 @item
7451 @email{gdb-announce@@sourceware.org, GDB Announcement mailing list}
7452 @item
7453 @email{info-gnu@@gnu.org, General GNU Announcement list} (but delay it a
7454 day or so to let things get out)
7455 @item
7456 @email{bug-gdb@@gnu.org, GDB Bug Report mailing list}
7457 @end itemize
7458
7459 @subsection Cleanup
7460
7461 The release is out but you're still not finished.
7462
7463 @subsubheading Commit outstanding changes
7464
7465 In particular you'll need to commit any changes to:
7466
7467 @itemize @bullet
7468 @item
7469 @file{gdb/ChangeLog}
7470 @item
7471 @file{gdb/version.in}
7472 @item
7473 @file{gdb/NEWS}
7474 @item
7475 @file{gdb/README}
7476 @end itemize
7477
7478 @subsubheading Tag the release
7479
7480 Something like:
7481
7482 @smallexample
7483 $ d=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
7484 $ echo $d
7485 2002-01-24
7486 $ ( cd insight/src/gdb && cvs -f -q update )
7487 $ ( cd insight/src && cvs -f -q tag gdb_5_2-$d-release )
7488 @end smallexample
7489
7490 Insight is used since that contains more of the release than
7491 @value{GDBN}.
7492
7493 @subsubheading Mention the release on the trunk
7494
7495 Just put something in the @file{ChangeLog} so that the trunk also
7496 indicates when the release was made.
7497
7498 @subsubheading Restart @file{gdb/version.in}
7499
7500 If @file{gdb/version.in} does not contain an ISO date such as
7501 @kbd{2002-01-24} then the daily @code{cronjob} won't update it. Having
7502 committed all the release changes it can be set to
7503 @file{5.2.0_0000-00-00-cvs} which will restart things (yes the @kbd{_}
7504 is important - it affects the snapshot process).
7505
7506 Don't forget the @file{ChangeLog}.
7507
7508 @subsubheading Merge into trunk
7509
7510 The files committed to the branch may also need changes merged into the
7511 trunk.
7512
7513 @subsubheading Revise the release schedule
7514
7515 Post a revised release schedule to @email{gdb@@sourceware.org, GDB
7516 Discussion List} with an updated announcement. The schedule can be
7517 generated by running:
7518
7519 @smallexample
7520 $ ~/ss/schedule `date +%s` schedule
7521 @end smallexample
7522
7523 @noindent
7524 The first parameter is approximate date/time in seconds (from the epoch)
7525 of the most recent release.
7526
7527 Also update the schedule @code{cronjob}.
7528
7529 @section Post release
7530
7531 Remove any @code{OBSOLETE} code.
7532
7533 @node Testsuite
7534
7535 @chapter Testsuite
7536 @cindex test suite
7537
7538 The testsuite is an important component of the @value{GDBN} package.
7539 While it is always worthwhile to encourage user testing, in practice
7540 this is rarely sufficient; users typically use only a small subset of
7541 the available commands, and it has proven all too common for a change
7542 to cause a significant regression that went unnoticed for some time.
7543
7544 The @value{GDBN} testsuite uses the DejaGNU testing framework. The
7545 tests themselves are calls to various @code{Tcl} procs; the framework
7546 runs all the procs and summarizes the passes and fails.
7547
7548 @section Using the Testsuite
7549
7550 @cindex running the test suite
7551 To run the testsuite, simply go to the @value{GDBN} object directory (or to the
7552 testsuite's objdir) and type @code{make check}. This just sets up some
7553 environment variables and invokes DejaGNU's @code{runtest} script. While
7554 the testsuite is running, you'll get mentions of which test file is in use,
7555 and a mention of any unexpected passes or fails. When the testsuite is
7556 finished, you'll get a summary that looks like this:
7557
7558 @smallexample
7559 === gdb Summary ===
7560
7561 # of expected passes 6016
7562 # of unexpected failures 58
7563 # of unexpected successes 5
7564 # of expected failures 183
7565 # of unresolved testcases 3
7566 # of untested testcases 5
7567 @end smallexample
7568
7569 To run a specific test script, type:
7570 @example
7571 make check RUNTESTFLAGS='@var{tests}'
7572 @end example
7573 where @var{tests} is a list of test script file names, separated by
7574 spaces.
7575
7576 If you use GNU make, you can use its @option{-j} option to run the
7577 testsuite in parallel. This can greatly reduce the amount of time it
7578 takes for the testsuite to run. In this case, if you set
7579 @code{RUNTESTFLAGS} then, by default, the tests will be run serially
7580 even under @option{-j}. You can override this and force a parallel run
7581 by setting the @code{make} variable @code{FORCE_PARALLEL} to any
7582 non-empty value. Note that the parallel @kbd{make check} assumes
7583 that you want to run the entire testsuite, so it is not compatible
7584 with some dejagnu options, like @option{--directory}.
7585
7586 The ideal test run consists of expected passes only; however, reality
7587 conspires to keep us from this ideal. Unexpected failures indicate
7588 real problems, whether in @value{GDBN} or in the testsuite. Expected
7589 failures are still failures, but ones which have been decided are too
7590 hard to deal with at the time; for instance, a test case might work
7591 everywhere except on AIX, and there is no prospect of the AIX case
7592 being fixed in the near future. Expected failures should not be added
7593 lightly, since you may be masking serious bugs in @value{GDBN}.
7594 Unexpected successes are expected fails that are passing for some
7595 reason, while unresolved and untested cases often indicate some minor
7596 catastrophe, such as the compiler being unable to deal with a test
7597 program.
7598
7599 When making any significant change to @value{GDBN}, you should run the
7600 testsuite before and after the change, to confirm that there are no
7601 regressions. Note that truly complete testing would require that you
7602 run the testsuite with all supported configurations and a variety of
7603 compilers; however this is more than really necessary. In many cases
7604 testing with a single configuration is sufficient. Other useful
7605 options are to test one big-endian (Sparc) and one little-endian (x86)
7606 host, a cross config with a builtin simulator (powerpc-eabi,
7607 mips-elf), or a 64-bit host (Alpha).
7608
7609 If you add new functionality to @value{GDBN}, please consider adding
7610 tests for it as well; this way future @value{GDBN} hackers can detect
7611 and fix their changes that break the functionality you added.
7612 Similarly, if you fix a bug that was not previously reported as a test
7613 failure, please add a test case for it. Some cases are extremely
7614 difficult to test, such as code that handles host OS failures or bugs
7615 in particular versions of compilers, and it's OK not to try to write
7616 tests for all of those.
7617
7618 DejaGNU supports separate build, host, and target machines. However,
7619 some @value{GDBN} test scripts do not work if the build machine and
7620 the host machine are not the same. In such an environment, these scripts
7621 will give a result of ``UNRESOLVED'', like this:
7622
7623 @smallexample
7624 UNRESOLVED: gdb.base/example.exp: This test script does not work on a remote host.
7625 @end smallexample
7626
7627 @section Testsuite Parameters
7628
7629 Several variables exist to modify the behavior of the testsuite.
7630
7631 @itemize @bullet
7632
7633 @item @code{TRANSCRIPT}
7634
7635 Sometimes it is convenient to get a transcript of the commands which
7636 the testsuite sends to @value{GDBN}. For example, if @value{GDBN}
7637 crashes during testing, a transcript can be used to more easily
7638 reconstruct the failure when running @value{GDBN} under @value{GDBN}.
7639
7640 You can instruct the @value{GDBN} testsuite to write transcripts by
7641 setting the DejaGNU variable @code{TRANSCRIPT} (to any value)
7642 before invoking @code{runtest} or @kbd{make check}. The transcripts
7643 will be written into DejaGNU's output directory. One transcript will
7644 be made for each invocation of @value{GDBN}; they will be named
7645 @file{transcript.@var{n}}, where @var{n} is an integer. The first
7646 line of the transcript file will show how @value{GDBN} was invoked;
7647 each subsequent line is a command sent as input to @value{GDBN}.
7648
7649 @smallexample
7650 make check RUNTESTFLAGS=TRANSCRIPT=y
7651 @end smallexample
7652
7653 Note that the transcript is not always complete. In particular, tests
7654 of completion can yield partial command lines.
7655
7656 @item @code{GDB}
7657
7658 Sometimes one wishes to test a different @value{GDBN} than the one in the build
7659 directory. For example, one may wish to run the testsuite on
7660 @file{/usr/bin/gdb}.
7661
7662 @smallexample
7663 make check RUNTESTFLAGS=GDB=/usr/bin/gdb
7664 @end smallexample
7665
7666 @item @code{GDBSERVER}
7667
7668 When testing a different @value{GDBN}, it is often useful to also test a
7669 different gdbserver.
7670
7671 @smallexample
7672 make check RUNTESTFLAGS="GDB=/usr/bin/gdb GDBSERVER=/usr/bin/gdbserver"
7673 @end smallexample
7674
7675 @item @code{INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS}
7676
7677 When running the testsuite normally one doesn't want whatever is in
7678 @file{~/.gdbinit} to interfere with the tests, therefore the test harness
7679 passes @option{-nx} to @value{GDBN}. One also doesn't want any windowed
7680 version of @value{GDBN}, e.g., @samp{gdb -tui}, to run.
7681 This is achieved via @code{INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS}.
7682
7683 @smallexample
7684 set INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS "-nw -nx"
7685 @end smallexample
7686
7687 This is all well and good, except when testing an installed @value{GDBN}
7688 that has been configured with @option{--with-system-gdbinit}. Here one
7689 does not want @file{~/.gdbinit} loaded but one may want the system
7690 @file{.gdbinit} file loaded. This can be achieved by pointing @code{$HOME}
7691 at a directory without a @file{.gdbinit} and by overriding
7692 @code{INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS} and removing @option{-nx}.
7693
7694 @smallexample
7695 cd testsuite
7696 HOME=`pwd` runtest \
7697 GDB=/usr/bin/gdb \
7698 GDBSERVER=/usr/bin/gdbserver \
7699 INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS=-nw
7700 @end smallexample
7701
7702 @end itemize
7703
7704 There are two ways to run the testsuite and pass additional parameters
7705 to DejaGnu. The first is with @kbd{make check} and specifying the
7706 makefile variable @samp{RUNTESTFLAGS}.
7707
7708 @smallexample
7709 make check RUNTESTFLAGS=TRANSCRIPT=y
7710 @end smallexample
7711
7712 The second is to cd to the @file{testsuite} directory and invoke the DejaGnu
7713 @command{runtest} command directly.
7714
7715 @smallexample
7716 cd testsuite
7717 make site.exp
7718 runtest TRANSCRIPT=y
7719 @end smallexample
7720
7721 @section Testsuite Configuration
7722 @cindex Testsuite Configuration
7723
7724 It is possible to adjust the behavior of the testsuite by defining
7725 the global variables listed below, either in a @file{site.exp} file,
7726 or in a board file.
7727
7728 @itemize @bullet
7729
7730 @item @code{gdb_test_timeout}
7731
7732 Defining this variable changes the default timeout duration used during
7733 communication with @value{GDBN}. More specifically, the global variable
7734 used during testing is @code{timeout}, but this variable gets reset to
7735 @code{gdb_test_timeout} at the beginning of each testcase, making sure
7736 that any local change to @code{timeout} in a testcase does not affect
7737 subsequent testcases.
7738
7739 This global variable comes in handy when the debugger is slower than
7740 normal due to the testing environment, triggering unexpected @code{TIMEOUT}
7741 test failures. Examples include when testing on a remote machine, or
7742 against a system where communications are slow.
7743
7744 If not specifically defined, this variable gets automatically defined
7745 to the same value as @code{timeout} during the testsuite initialization.
7746 The default value of the timeout is defined in the file
7747 @file{gdb/testsuite/config/unix.exp} that is part of the @value{GDBN}
7748 test suite@footnote{If you are using a board file, it could override
7749 the test-suite default; search the board file for "timeout".}.
7750
7751 @end itemize
7752
7753 @section Testsuite Organization
7754
7755 @cindex test suite organization
7756 The testsuite is entirely contained in @file{gdb/testsuite}. While the
7757 testsuite includes some makefiles and configury, these are very minimal,
7758 and used for little besides cleaning up, since the tests themselves
7759 handle the compilation of the programs that @value{GDBN} will run. The file
7760 @file{testsuite/lib/gdb.exp} contains common utility procs useful for
7761 all @value{GDBN} tests, while the directory @file{testsuite/config} contains
7762 configuration-specific files, typically used for special-purpose
7763 definitions of procs like @code{gdb_load} and @code{gdb_start}.
7764
7765 The tests themselves are to be found in @file{testsuite/gdb.*} and
7766 subdirectories of those. The names of the test files must always end
7767 with @file{.exp}. DejaGNU collects the test files by wildcarding
7768 in the test directories, so both subdirectories and individual files
7769 get chosen and run in alphabetical order.
7770
7771 The following table lists the main types of subdirectories and what they
7772 are for. Since DejaGNU finds test files no matter where they are
7773 located, and since each test file sets up its own compilation and
7774 execution environment, this organization is simply for convenience and
7775 intelligibility.
7776
7777 @table @file
7778 @item gdb.base
7779 This is the base testsuite. The tests in it should apply to all
7780 configurations of @value{GDBN} (but generic native-only tests may live here).
7781 The test programs should be in the subset of C that is valid K&R,
7782 ANSI/ISO, and C@t{++} (@code{#ifdef}s are allowed if necessary, for instance
7783 for prototypes).
7784
7785 @item gdb.@var{lang}
7786 Language-specific tests for any language @var{lang} besides C. Examples are
7787 @file{gdb.cp} and @file{gdb.java}.
7788
7789 @item gdb.@var{platform}
7790 Non-portable tests. The tests are specific to a specific configuration
7791 (host or target), such as HP-UX or eCos. Example is @file{gdb.hp}, for
7792 HP-UX.
7793
7794 @item gdb.@var{compiler}
7795 Tests specific to a particular compiler. As of this writing (June
7796 1999), there aren't currently any groups of tests in this category that
7797 couldn't just as sensibly be made platform-specific, but one could
7798 imagine a @file{gdb.gcc}, for tests of @value{GDBN}'s handling of GCC
7799 extensions.
7800
7801 @item gdb.@var{subsystem}
7802 Tests that exercise a specific @value{GDBN} subsystem in more depth. For
7803 instance, @file{gdb.disasm} exercises various disassemblers, while
7804 @file{gdb.stabs} tests pathways through the stabs symbol reader.
7805 @end table
7806
7807 @section Writing Tests
7808 @cindex writing tests
7809
7810 In many areas, the @value{GDBN} tests are already quite comprehensive; you
7811 should be able to copy existing tests to handle new cases.
7812
7813 You should try to use @code{gdb_test} whenever possible, since it
7814 includes cases to handle all the unexpected errors that might happen.
7815 However, it doesn't cost anything to add new test procedures; for
7816 instance, @file{gdb.base/exprs.exp} defines a @code{test_expr} that
7817 calls @code{gdb_test} multiple times.
7818
7819 Only use @code{send_gdb} and @code{gdb_expect} when absolutely
7820 necessary. Even if @value{GDBN} has several valid responses to
7821 a command, you can use @code{gdb_test_multiple}. Like @code{gdb_test},
7822 @code{gdb_test_multiple} recognizes internal errors and unexpected
7823 prompts.
7824
7825 Do not write tests which expect a literal tab character from @value{GDBN}.
7826 On some operating systems (e.g.@: OpenBSD) the TTY layer expands tabs to
7827 spaces, so by the time @value{GDBN}'s output reaches expect the tab is gone.
7828
7829 The source language programs do @emph{not} need to be in a consistent
7830 style. Since @value{GDBN} is used to debug programs written in many different
7831 styles, it's worth having a mix of styles in the testsuite; for
7832 instance, some @value{GDBN} bugs involving the display of source lines would
7833 never manifest themselves if the programs used GNU coding style
7834 uniformly.
7835
7836 Some testcase results need more detailed explanation:
7837
7838 @table @code
7839 @item KFAIL
7840 Known problem of @value{GDBN} itself. You must specify the @value{GDBN} bug
7841 report number like in these sample tests:
7842 @smallexample
7843 kfail "gdb/13392" "continue to marker 2"
7844 @end smallexample
7845 or
7846 @smallexample
7847 setup_kfail gdb/13392 "*-*-*"
7848 kfail "continue to marker 2"
7849 @end smallexample
7850
7851 @item XFAIL
7852 Known problem of environment. This typically includes @value{NGCC} but it
7853 includes also many other system components which cannot be fixed in the
7854 @value{GDBN} project. Sample test with sanity check not knowing the specific
7855 cause of the problem:
7856 @smallexample
7857 # On x86_64 it is commonly about 4MB.
7858 if @{$stub_size > 25000000@} @{
7859 xfail "stub size $stub_size is too large"
7860 return
7861 @}
7862 @end smallexample
7863
7864 You should provide bug report number for the failing component of the
7865 environment, if such bug report is available:
7866 @smallexample
7867 if @{[test_compiler_info @{gcc-[0-3]-*@}]
7868 || [test_compiler_info @{gcc-4-[0-5]-*@}]@} @{
7869 setup_xfail "gcc/46955" *-*-*
7870 @}
7871 gdb_test "python print ttype.template_argument(2)" "&C::c"
7872 @end smallexample
7873 @end table
7874
7875 @section Board settings
7876 In @value{GDBN} testsuite, the tests can be configured or customized in the board
7877 file by means of @dfn{Board Settings}. Each setting should be consulted by
7878 test cases that depend on the corresponding feature.
7879
7880 Here are the supported board settings:
7881
7882 @table @code
7883
7884 @item gdb,cannot_call_functions
7885 The board does not support inferior call, that is, invoking inferior functions
7886 in @value{GDBN}.
7887 @item gdb,can_reverse
7888 The board supports reverse execution.
7889 @item gdb,no_hardware_watchpoints
7890 The board does not support hardware watchpoints.
7891 @item gdb,nofileio
7892 @value{GDBN} is unable to intercept target file operations in remote and perform
7893 them on the host.
7894 @item gdb,noinferiorio
7895 The board is unable to provide I/O capability to the inferior.
7896 @c @item gdb,noresults
7897 @c NEED DOCUMENT.
7898 @item gdb,nosignals
7899 The board does not support signals.
7900 @item gdb,skip_huge_test
7901 Skip time-consuming tests on the board with slow connection.
7902 @item gdb,skip_float_tests
7903 Skip tests related to float points on target board.
7904 @item gdb,use_precord
7905 The board supports process record.
7906 @item gdb_server_prog
7907 The location of GDBserver. If GDBserver somewhere other than its default
7908 location is used in test, specify the location of GDBserver in this variable.
7909 The location is a file name of GDBserver that can be either absolute or
7910 relative to testsuite subdirectory in build directory.
7911 @item in_proc_agent
7912 The location of in-process agent. If in-process agent other than its default
7913 location is used in test, specify the location of in-process agent in
7914 this variable. The location is a file name of in-process agent that can be
7915 either absolute or relative to testsuite subdirectory in build directory.
7916 @item noargs
7917 @value{GDBN} does not support argument passing for inferior.
7918 @item no_long_long
7919 The board does not support type @code{long long}.
7920 @c @item use_cygmon
7921 @c NEED DOCUMENT.
7922 @item use_gdb_stub
7923 The tests are running with gdb stub.
7924 @end table
7925
7926 @node Hints
7927
7928 @chapter Hints
7929
7930 Check the @file{README} file, it often has useful information that does not
7931 appear anywhere else in the directory.
7932
7933 @menu
7934 * Getting Started:: Getting started working on @value{GDBN}
7935 * Debugging GDB:: Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
7936 @end menu
7937
7938 @node Getting Started
7939
7940 @section Getting Started
7941
7942 @value{GDBN} is a large and complicated program, and if you first starting to
7943 work on it, it can be hard to know where to start. Fortunately, if you
7944 know how to go about it, there are ways to figure out what is going on.
7945
7946 This manual, the @value{GDBN} Internals manual, has information which applies
7947 generally to many parts of @value{GDBN}.
7948
7949 Information about particular functions or data structures are located in
7950 comments with those functions or data structures. If you run across a
7951 function or a global variable which does not have a comment correctly
7952 explaining what is does, this can be thought of as a bug in @value{GDBN}; feel
7953 free to submit a bug report, with a suggested comment if you can figure
7954 out what the comment should say. If you find a comment which is
7955 actually wrong, be especially sure to report that.
7956
7957 Comments explaining the function of macros defined in host, target, or
7958 native dependent files can be in several places. Sometimes they are
7959 repeated every place the macro is defined. Sometimes they are where the
7960 macro is used. Sometimes there is a header file which supplies a
7961 default definition of the macro, and the comment is there. This manual
7962 also documents all the available macros.
7963 @c (@pxref{Host Conditionals}, @pxref{Target
7964 @c Conditionals}, @pxref{Native Conditionals}, and @pxref{Obsolete
7965 @c Conditionals})
7966
7967 Start with the header files. Once you have some idea of how
7968 @value{GDBN}'s internal symbol tables are stored (see @file{symtab.h},
7969 @file{gdbtypes.h}), you will find it much easier to understand the
7970 code which uses and creates those symbol tables.
7971
7972 You may wish to process the information you are getting somehow, to
7973 enhance your understanding of it. Summarize it, translate it to another
7974 language, add some (perhaps trivial or non-useful) feature to @value{GDBN}, use
7975 the code to predict what a test case would do and write the test case
7976 and verify your prediction, etc. If you are reading code and your eyes
7977 are starting to glaze over, this is a sign you need to use a more active
7978 approach.
7979
7980 Once you have a part of @value{GDBN} to start with, you can find more
7981 specifically the part you are looking for by stepping through each
7982 function with the @code{next} command. Do not use @code{step} or you
7983 will quickly get distracted; when the function you are stepping through
7984 calls another function try only to get a big-picture understanding
7985 (perhaps using the comment at the beginning of the function being
7986 called) of what it does. This way you can identify which of the
7987 functions being called by the function you are stepping through is the
7988 one which you are interested in. You may need to examine the data
7989 structures generated at each stage, with reference to the comments in
7990 the header files explaining what the data structures are supposed to
7991 look like.
7992
7993 Of course, this same technique can be used if you are just reading the
7994 code, rather than actually stepping through it. The same general
7995 principle applies---when the code you are looking at calls something
7996 else, just try to understand generally what the code being called does,
7997 rather than worrying about all its details.
7998
7999 @cindex command implementation
8000 A good place to start when tracking down some particular area is with
8001 a command which invokes that feature. Suppose you want to know how
8002 single-stepping works. As a @value{GDBN} user, you know that the
8003 @code{step} command invokes single-stepping. The command is invoked
8004 via command tables (see @file{command.h}); by convention the function
8005 which actually performs the command is formed by taking the name of
8006 the command and adding @samp{_command}, or in the case of an
8007 @code{info} subcommand, @samp{_info}. For example, the @code{step}
8008 command invokes the @code{step_command} function and the @code{info
8009 display} command invokes @code{display_info}. When this convention is
8010 not followed, you might have to use @code{grep} or @kbd{M-x
8011 tags-search} in emacs, or run @value{GDBN} on itself and set a
8012 breakpoint in @code{execute_command}.
8013
8014 @cindex @code{bug-gdb} mailing list
8015 If all of the above fail, it may be appropriate to ask for information
8016 on @code{bug-gdb}. But @emph{never} post a generic question like ``I was
8017 wondering if anyone could give me some tips about understanding
8018 @value{GDBN}''---if we had some magic secret we would put it in this manual.
8019 Suggestions for improving the manual are always welcome, of course.
8020
8021 @node Debugging GDB
8022
8023 @section Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
8024 @cindex debugging @value{GDBN}
8025
8026 If @value{GDBN} is limping on your machine, this is the preferred way to get it
8027 fully functional. Be warned that in some ancient Unix systems, like
8028 Ultrix 4.2, a program can't be running in one process while it is being
8029 debugged in another. Rather than typing the command @kbd{@w{./gdb
8030 ./gdb}}, which works on Suns and such, you can copy @file{gdb} to
8031 @file{gdb2} and then type @kbd{@w{./gdb ./gdb2}}.
8032
8033 When you run @value{GDBN} in the @value{GDBN} source directory, it will read a
8034 @file{.gdbinit} file that sets up some simple things to make debugging
8035 gdb easier. The @code{info} command, when executed without a subcommand
8036 in a @value{GDBN} being debugged by gdb, will pop you back up to the top level
8037 gdb. See @file{.gdbinit} for details.
8038
8039 If you use emacs, you will probably want to do a @code{make TAGS} after
8040 you configure your distribution; this will put the machine dependent
8041 routines for your local machine where they will be accessed first by
8042 @kbd{M-.}
8043
8044 Also, make sure that you've either compiled @value{GDBN} with your local cc, or
8045 have run @code{fixincludes} if you are compiling with gcc.
8046
8047 @section Submitting Patches
8048
8049 @cindex submitting patches
8050 Thanks for thinking of offering your changes back to the community of
8051 @value{GDBN} users. In general we like to get well designed enhancements.
8052 Thanks also for checking in advance about the best way to transfer the
8053 changes.
8054
8055 The @value{GDBN} maintainers will only install ``cleanly designed'' patches.
8056 This manual summarizes what we believe to be clean design for @value{GDBN}.
8057
8058 If the maintainers don't have time to put the patch in when it arrives,
8059 or if there is any question about a patch, it goes into a large queue
8060 with everyone else's patches and bug reports.
8061
8062 @cindex legal papers for code contributions
8063 The legal issue is that to incorporate substantial changes requires a
8064 copyright assignment from you and/or your employer, granting ownership
8065 of the changes to the Free Software Foundation. You can get the
8066 standard documents for doing this by sending mail to @code{gnu@@gnu.org}
8067 and asking for it. We recommend that people write in "All programs
8068 owned by the Free Software Foundation" as "NAME OF PROGRAM", so that
8069 changes in many programs (not just @value{GDBN}, but GAS, Emacs, GCC,
8070 etc) can be
8071 contributed with only one piece of legalese pushed through the
8072 bureaucracy and filed with the FSF. We can't start merging changes until
8073 this paperwork is received by the FSF (their rules, which we follow
8074 since we maintain it for them).
8075
8076 Technically, the easiest way to receive changes is to receive each
8077 feature as a small context diff or unidiff, suitable for @code{patch}.
8078 Each message sent to me should include the changes to C code and
8079 header files for a single feature, plus @file{ChangeLog} entries for
8080 each directory where files were modified, and diffs for any changes
8081 needed to the manuals (@file{gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo} or
8082 @file{gdb/doc/gdbint.texinfo}). If there are a lot of changes for a
8083 single feature, they can be split down into multiple messages.
8084
8085 In this way, if we read and like the feature, we can add it to the
8086 sources with a single patch command, do some testing, and check it in.
8087 If you leave out the @file{ChangeLog}, we have to write one. If you leave
8088 out the doc, we have to puzzle out what needs documenting. Etc., etc.
8089
8090 The reason to send each change in a separate message is that we will not
8091 install some of the changes. They'll be returned to you with questions
8092 or comments. If we're doing our job correctly, the message back to you
8093 will say what you have to fix in order to make the change acceptable.
8094 The reason to have separate messages for separate features is so that
8095 the acceptable changes can be installed while one or more changes are
8096 being reworked. If multiple features are sent in a single message, we
8097 tend to not put in the effort to sort out the acceptable changes from
8098 the unacceptable, so none of the features get installed until all are
8099 acceptable.
8100
8101 If this sounds painful or authoritarian, well, it is. But we get a lot
8102 of bug reports and a lot of patches, and many of them don't get
8103 installed because we don't have the time to finish the job that the bug
8104 reporter or the contributor could have done. Patches that arrive
8105 complete, working, and well designed, tend to get installed on the day
8106 they arrive. The others go into a queue and get installed as time
8107 permits, which, since the maintainers have many demands to meet, may not
8108 be for quite some time.
8109
8110 Please send patches directly to
8111 @email{gdb-patches@@sourceware.org, the @value{GDBN} maintainers}.
8112
8113 @section Build Script
8114
8115 @cindex build script
8116
8117 The script @file{gdb_buildall.sh} builds @value{GDBN} with flag
8118 @option{--enable-targets=all} set. This builds @value{GDBN} with all supported
8119 targets activated. This helps testing @value{GDBN} when doing changes that
8120 affect more than one architecture and is much faster than using
8121 @file{gdb_mbuild.sh}.
8122
8123 After building @value{GDBN} the script checks which architectures are
8124 supported and then switches the current architecture to each of those to get
8125 information about the architecture. The test results are stored in log files
8126 in the directory the script was called from.
8127
8128 @include observer.texi
8129
8130 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8131 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8132 @include fdl.texi
8133
8134 @node Concept Index
8135 @unnumbered Concept Index
8136
8137 @printindex cp
8138
8139 @node Function and Variable Index
8140 @unnumbered Function and Variable Index
8141
8142 @printindex fn
8143
8144 @bye
This page took 0.207024 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.